Vs1Sp AC V/HZ and Sensorless Vector Control: Installation & Operating Manual

VS1SP
AC V/Hz and Sensorless Vector

Control
11/10 Installation & Operating Manual MN764

Any trademarks used in this manual are the property of their respective owners.
Important:
Be sure to check www.baldor.com for the latest software, firmware and drivers for your VS1SP product. Also you can
download the latest version of this manual in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Getting Assistance from Baldor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Safety Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Quick Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Chapter 2
General Information
2.1 Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.1 Design and Test Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.2 Environmental Test Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.3 Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 3
Installing the Drive
3.1 Receiving & Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 General Requirements for the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Location Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Minimum Mounting Clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 Mounting the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3.1 Protecting the Drive from Debris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3.2 Watts Loss Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.4 Cover Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chapter 4
Power Wiring
4.1 Grounding the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Ungrounded Distribution System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Input Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Line Impedence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 Line Reactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.2 Load Reactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Line Disconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4 Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.5 Reduced Input Voltage Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.6 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.7 Optional Filter/Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.8 Incoming Power and Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.9 Operating a 3 Phase Control on Single Phase Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.9.1 Single Phase Power Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.10 M-Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.11 Long Motor Leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.12 Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
MN764 i
Chapter 5
Control Wiring
5.1 Control Board Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Analog Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Analog Input 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Analog Input 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Opto-Isolated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5.1 Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5.2 Standard Run 2Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.3 Standard Run 3Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.4 15 Preset Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5.5 Fan Pump 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5.6 Fan Pump 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.7 Process Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5.8 3 Speed Analog 2Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5.9 3 Speed Analog 3Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.10 E-POT 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.5.11 E-POT 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.12 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.5.13 Profile Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.14 Bipolar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.15 Pulse Follower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.5.16 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.6 Digital Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.7 Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.8 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.9 Communication Expansion Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.9.1 RS485 Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.10 Opto-Isolated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.11 Opto-Isolated Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.12 Pre-Operation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.13 Powerup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.14 Mint WorkBench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.14.1 Install USB Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.14.2 Install Mint WorkBench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.14.3 Update Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
ii MN764
Chapter 6
Using the Keypad
6.1 Keypad Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Display Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Status Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Menu Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.4 Basic Params . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.5 Save Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.6 Restore Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.7 Advanced Prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.7.1 Modified Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.7.2 Linear List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.8 Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.9 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.10 Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.11 Operating the Control from the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.11.1 Accessing the Keypad JOG Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.11.2 Speed Adjustment using Local Speed Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Chapter 7
Parameter Descriptions
7.1 Level 1 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 1 Blocks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Level 2 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 2 Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3 Level 3 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 3 Blocks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Chapter 8
Customizing for Your Application
8.1 Customizing for your Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
9.1 Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Diagnostic Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.3 Fault Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 Electrical Noise Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Chapter 10
PLC Mode Description
10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Configuring Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.3 Comparator Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.4 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.5 PLC Mode as Standard Run 2Wire Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.6 PLC Mode as 15 Preset Speed Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.7 PLC Mode as Process PID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.8 PLC Mode as a Modified Process PID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
MN764 iii
Chapter 11
Composite Reference Description
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Composite Reference Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Chapter 12
Monitor and RTC Description
12.1 Monitor Parameters (P0001 to P0202). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
A.1 VS1SP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2 Specifications for Power Terminal Block Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.3 Identifying the Drive by Model Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Storage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.5 VS1SP Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6 VS1SP Terminal Wire Gauge Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.7 Drive Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Appendix B
Parameter Tables
B.1 Level 1 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 1 Blocks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C
CE Guidelines
C.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.2 EMC - Conformity and CE Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.3 EMC Installation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.4 Grounding the Wall Mounting (Class A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.5 Grounding the Enclosure Mounting (Class B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.6 Use of CE Compliant Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.7 EMC Wiring Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.8 EMC Installation Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Appendix D
Options and Kits
D.1 Dynamic Braking (DB) Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2 Expansion Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.3 Keypad Extension Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.4 Optional Remote Keypad Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Appendix E
Remote Keypad Mounting Template
E.1 Remote Keypad Mounting Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
iv MN764
Chapter 1
Introduction
The information in this manual supports firmware versions up through 1.23.
This manual is intended for qualified electrical personnel familiar with installing, programming and maintaining AC Drives.
This manual contains information on:
• Installing and wiring the VS1SP drive
• Programming the drive
• Troubleshooting the drive
1.1 Getting Assistance from Baldor

For technical assistance, contact your Baldor District Office. Before calling, please review the troubleshooting section of this
manual. You will be asked for the drive model number or catalog number that is located on the nameplate along with the
drive serial number.
1.2 Safety Notice

This equipment contains voltages that may be as high as 1000 volts! Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury. Only
qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are driven by this equipment.
Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or
troubleshoot this equipment.
CLASSIFICATIONS OF CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage to
property.
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not touch any circuit board, power device or electrical connection before you first ensure
that power has been disconnected and there is no high voltage present from this equipment or
other equipment to which it is connected. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury. Only
qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
WARNING: Be sure that you are completely familiar with the safe operation of this equipment. This equipment
may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are controlled by this
equipment. Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should
attempt the start-up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use motor overload relays with an automatic reset feature. These are dangerous since the
process may injure someone if a sudden or unexpected automatic restart occurs. If manual reset
relays are not available, disable the automatic restart feature using external control wiring.
WARNING: This unit has an automatic restart feature that will start the motor whenever input power is
applied and a RUN (FWD or REV) command is issued. If an automatic restart of the motor could
cause injury to personnel, the automatic restart feature should be disabled.
WARNING: Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power. Do not apply AC power before
you ensure that all grounding instructions have been followed. Electrical shock can cause serious
or fatal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove cover or open door for at least five (5) minutes after AC power is disconnected to
allow capacitors to discharge. Dangerous voltages are present inside the equipment. Electrical
shock can cause serious or fatal injury.

WARNING: Improper operation of control may cause violent motion of the motor shaft and driven equipment.
Be certain that unexpected motor shaft movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage
to equipment. Certain failure modes of the control can produce peak torque of several times the
rated motor torque.
WARNING: Motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied, even when motor is
not rotating. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING: Dynamic brake resistors may generate enough heat to ignite combustible materials. Keep all
combustible materials and flammable vapors away from brake resistors.
MN764 Introduction 1-1

WARNING: The motor shaft will rotate during the autotune procedure. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft
movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

WARNING: MEDICAL DEVICE/PACEMAKER DANGER - Magnetic and electromagnetic fields in the vicinity
of current carrying conductors and industrial motors can result in a serious health hazard to
persons with cardiac pacemakers, internal cardiac defibrillators, neurostimulators, metal
implants, cochlear implants, hearing aids, and other medical devices. To avoid risk, stay away
from the area surrounding a motor and its current carrying conductors.
CAUTION: Disconnect motor leads (T1, T2 and T3) from control before you perform a dielectric withstand
(insulation) test on the motor. Failure to disconnect motor from the control will result in extensive
damage to the control. The control is tested at the factory for high voltage/leakage resistance as
part of the Underwriters Laboratory requirements.
CAUTION: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical short circuit
amperes listed here at rated voltage.
Horsepower RMS Symmetrical Amperes
1-50 5,000
51-200 10,000
201-400 18,000
401-600 30,000
601-900 42,000
CAUTION: Do not connect AC power to the Motor terminals T1, T2 and T3. Connecting AC power to these
terminals may result in damage to the control.
CAUTION: Baldor does not recommend using “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer supplies that may create
ground loops. Instead, we recommend using a four wire Wye.
CAUTION: Do not supply any power to the External Trip (motor thermostat) leads at TH1 and TH2. Power on
these leads can damage the control. Use a dry contact type that requires no external power to
operate.
CAUTION: If a customer installed Dynamic Brake (DB) hardware mounting is in any position other than
vertical, the DB hardware must be derated by 35% of its rated capacity.
CAUTION: Before external Dynamic Brake Hardware is added, the internal resistor must be disconnected
(frames AA, B, C and D only). Remove the resistor from the B+/R1 and R2 terminals and insulate
the leads to avoid accidental connection to drive circuity. The external resistor can be connected
across these terminals. Failure to remove the internal resistor will decrease the total resistance
(parallel connection) and cause damage.
CAUTION: Do not set Level 2, Drive Configure, Power Input parameter to Common Bus if AC power
is connected to L1, L2 or L3. Common Bus requires numerous changes. Contact Baldor for
information.
CAUTION: Only Baldor cables should be used to connect the keypad and control. These are special twisted
pair cables to protect the control and keypad. Damage associated with other cable types are not
covered by the Baldor warranty.
CAUTION: If an M-Contactor is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 200msec before the
M-Contactor is opened. If the M-Contactor is opened while the control is supplying voltage and
current to the motor, the control may be damaged. Before the control is enabled, the M-Contactor
must be closed for at least 200msec.
CAUTION: Use of power correction capacitors on the output of the drive can result in erratic operation
of the motor, nuisance tripping, and/or permanent damage to the drive. Remove power
correction capacitors before proceeding. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
CAUTION: Do not connect any shields to the encoder case or motor frame. The encoder +5/12VDC supply
at pins 8 and 9 of the encoder board is referenced to circuit board common. Do not connect any
shields to ground or another power supply or damage to the control may result.
CAUTION: Motor thermostat leads must be routed in a separate conduit than the motor power leads. Failure
to isolate these connections may cause nuisance trips, misoperation or component failure.
1-2 Introduction MN764

1.3 Quick Start (Quick Start Guide MS764 is also available separately from www.baldor.com.)
If you are an experienced user of Baldor controls, you are probably already familiar with the keypad programming and
keypad operation methods. If so, this quick start guide has been prepared for you. This procedure will help get your system
up and running in the keypad mode quickly and allows motor and control operation to be verified. This procedure assumes
that the Control, Motor and Dynamic Brake hardware are correctly installed (see Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for procedures)
and that you have an understanding of the keypad programming and operation procedures. Figure 1-1 shows minimum
connection requirements. It is not necessary to wire the terminal strip to operate in Keypad mode (Chapter 5 describes
terminal strip wiring procedures).
The quick start procedure is as follows:
1. Read the Safety Notice and Precautions in this Chapter.
2. Mount the control. Refer to Chapters 3, 4, and 5 “Physical Location” procedure.
3. Connect AC power ensuring source voltage matches drive voltage (Figure 1-1). See wire and fuse size guidelines in
Chapter 4. Torque connections per Table A-2.
4. Connect the motor ensuring motor is wired for same voltage as drive (Figure 1-1). Torque connections per Table A-2. Do
not couple the motor shaft to the load until auto tune is complete.
5. Install Dynamic brake hardware, if required. Refer to Chapter 4 “Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware.”
6. Connect motor thermostat leads to TH1 and TH2 after removing factory supplied jumper. Be sure to route these leads in
a separate conduit from the motor power leads.
CAUTION: After completing the installation but before you apply power, be sure to check the following
electrical items:
1. Verify AC line voltage at source matches control rating.
2. Inspect all power connections for accuracy, workmanship and torques as well as compliance to codes.
3. Verify control and motor are grounded to each other and the control is connected to earth ground.
4. Check all signal wiring for accuracy.
5. Be certain all brake coils, contactors and relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an R-C filter for AC coils and
reverse polarity diodes for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not adequate.
CAUTION: Make sure that unexpected operation of the motor shaft during start up will not cause injury to
personnel or damage to equipment.
Procedure - Initial Conditions

Be sure the Control, Motor and Dynamic Brake hardware are wired according to the procedures described in Chapters 4
and 5 of this manual. Become familiar with the keypad programming and keypad operation of the control as described in
Chapter 6 of this manual.
1. Remove all power from the control.
2. Verify that any enable inputs to J2-8 are open (remove factory jumper from J2-8 to J3-24).
3. Uncouple the motor from the load (including coupling or inertia wheels).
4. Turn power on. Be sure there are no faults displayed. If a fault is indicated, refer to Chapter 9 “Troubleshooting”.
5. Select “Advanced Prog”, “Level 2 Blocks”, “Drive Config” and set the parameter “Factory Settings” to “Yes”. This will
change all parameters to Factory Default.
6. Set the Level 2 Drive Limits block, “OPERATING ZONE” parameter as desired.
(STD CONST TQ, STD VAR TQ, QUIET CONST TQ or QUIET VAR TQ).
7. If external dynamic brake hardware is used, set the Level 2 Brake Adjust block “Resistor Ohms” and “Resistor Watts”
parameters (see parameter description in Chapter 7 for more information).
8. Enable the control (J2-8 connect to J3-24).
CAUTION: The motor shaft will rotate during this procedure. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft
movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
9. Select Basic Params from the main keypad menu. Perform each step including motor data and “Calc Motor Model”.
10. For more advanced tuning of the uncoupled motor to the drive, see the Autotune parameters in Level 2 programming.
12. Couple the motor to its load.
13. Verify freedom of motion of motor shaft.
14. Verify the motor coupling is tight without backlash.
15. Verify the holding brakes, if any, are properly adjusted to fully release and set to the desired torque value.
16. Turn power on. Be sure no errors or faults are displayed.
17. Run the drive from the keypad using one of the following: the arrow keys for direct speed control, a keypad entered
speed or the JOG mode.
18. Select and program additional parameters to suit your application.
The control is now ready for use in the keypad mode. If a different operating mode is desired, refer to Chapter 5 Operating
Modes and Chapter 6 and 7 for Programming and Operation.
For more advanced tuning of the drive speed loop once coupled to the load, see “Speed Loop Tune” in “Autotune Block” in
Chapter 7.
MN764 Introduction 1-3

Figure 1-1 Minimum Connection Diagram
Minimum Signal Connections
J3 Terminals 21 to 30 (J3)
21 External User +24V Return
21 Terminals 8 to 20 (J2) 22 External User +24V
8 Enable Input 23 Internal +24V
USB Port 24 Internal +24V Return
J2 9 Digital Input #1
10 Digital Input #2 25 Relay Out 1 NC
8 11 Digital Input #3 26 Relay Out 1 COM
J1 12 Digital Input #4 27 Relay Out 1 NO
1 Terminals 1 to 7 (J1) 13 Digital Input #5 28 Relay Out 2 NC
1 User Analog Return 14 Digital Input #6 29 Relay Out 2 COM
2 Analog Input #1 15 Digital Input #7 30 Relay Out 2 NO
3 Analog Ref. Power 16 Digital Input #8
4 Analog Input #2 + 17 Digital Out #1+ (Collector)
5 Analog Input #2 - 18 Digital Out #1- (Emitter)
6 Analog Output #1 19 Digital Out #2+ (Collector)
7 Analog Output #2 20 Digital Out #2- (Emitter)
For keypad operation, only Enable (J2-8) is required.
AC Power & Motor Connections

Motor Thermal
Example of Terminal Strip Layout ** R1/B+ Motor Leads Leads*
L1 L2 L3 R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND
Earth Ground
Input AC
Power DB Resistor
(Internal)
Fuses
T1
T2
T3
Motor TH1
TH2
G
GND
Note: The control enable input must be active to allow operation. Therefore, J2-8 Enable is connected by a factory installed
jumper to J3-24. This uses the internal supply and provides an active low at J2-8.
* Remove TH1 and TH2 jumper if Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
Note: Motor thermal leads must be run in a separate conduit from motor power leads.
Note: An open circuit on these terminals will generate a motor overtemperature fault. Refer to the fault / troubleshooting
information provided in Chapter 9.
** See Figure 4-3 for terminal arrangement for the various frame sizes.
1-4 Introduction MN764

Chapter 2
General Information
The VS1SP control uses flux vector technology. Flux vector technology (sometimes referred to as Field Oriented Control) is
a control scheme that uses an algorithm to adjust the frequency and phase of voltage and current applied to a three phase
induction motor.
The control’s rated output power is based on the use of a NEMA design B four pole motor and 60Hz operation at nominal
rated input voltage. If any other type of motor is used, the control should be sized to the motor using the rated current of
the motor. The control may be used in various applications. It may be programmed by the user to operate in four different
operating zones: standard or quiet and constant torque or variable torque. It can also be configured to operate in a number
of modes depending upon the application requirements and user preference. It is the responsibility of the user to determine
the optimum operating zone and mode to interface the control to the application. These choices are made with the keypad
as explained in Chapter 6 of this manual.
2.1 Limited Warranty

For a period of two (2) years from the date of original purchase, BALDOR will repair or replace without charge controls
and accessories which our examination proves to be defective in material or workmanship. This warranty is valid if the
unit has not been tampered with by unauthorized persons, misused, abused, or improperly installed and has been used
in accordance with the instructions and/or ratings supplied. This warranty is in lieu of any other warranty or guarantee
expressed or implied. BALDOR shall not be held responsible for any expense (including installation and removal),
inconvenience, or consequential damage, including injury to any person or property caused by items of our manufacture or
sale. (Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may
not apply.) In any event, BALDOR’s total liability, under all circumstances, shall not exceed the full purchase price of the
control. Claims for purchase price refunds, repairs, or replacements must be referred to BALDOR with all pertinent data as to
the defect, the date purchased, the task performed by the control, and the problem encountered. No liability is assumed for
expendable items such as fuses.
Goods may be returned only with written notification including a BALDOR Return Authorization Number and any return
shipments must be prepaid.
2.2 Standards
The VS1SP drives have been designed and tested to comply with the following standards.
2.2.1 Design and Test Standards

• UL508C: Power Conversion Equipment.
• UL840: Insulation coordination including clearance and creepage distances for electrical equipment.
• CSA C22.2 No. 14: Industrial Control Equipment.
• EN61800-5-1: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Safety requirements.
Electrical, thermal and energy.
• EN50178: Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
• EN60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
• EN61800-3: When installed as directed in this manual, VS1SP drives conform to the category C3 emission limits and the
‘second environment’ immunity requirements defined by this standard.
2.2.2 Environmental Test Standards

• EN60068-1: Environmental testing, general and guidance.
• EN60068-2-2: Environmental testing, Test B. Dry heat.
• EN60068-2-78: Environmental testing, Test cab. Damp heat, steady state.
• EN60068-2-6: Vibration testing.
2.2.3 Marks
See also Appendix C for general recommendations for CE compliance.
MN764 General Information 2-1

2-2 General Information MN764
Chapter 3
Installing the Drive
This chapter provides information that must be considered when planning a VS1SP drive installation and provides drive
mounting information and installation site requirements.
3.1 Receiving & Inspection

When you receive your control, there are several things you should do immediately.
1. Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage immediately to the commercial carrier that
delivered your control.
2. Remove the control from the shipping container and remove all packing materials from the control. The container and
packing materials may be retained for future shipment.
3. Verify that the catalog number of the control you received is the same as the catalog number listed on your purchase
order.
4. Inspect the control for external physical damage that may have been sustained during shipment and report any damage
immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your control.
5. If the control is to be stored for several weeks before use, make sure that it is stored in a location that conforms to
published storage humidity and temperature specifications stated in this manual.
3.2 General Requirements for the Installation Site

It is important to ensure that the drive’s environment and operating conditions are satisfactory. The area behind the drive
must be kept clear of all control and power wiring. Power connections may create electromagnetic fields that may interfere
with control wiring or components when run in close proximity to the drive.
Read the recommendations in the following sections before continuing with the drive installation.
3.2.1 Location Instructions
Before deciding on an installation site, consider the following guidelines:
• Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles.
• Do not expose the drive to a corrosive atmosphere.
• Protect the drive from moisture and direct sunlight.
• Verify that the drive location will meet the environmental conditions specified in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Ambient Temperatures and Mounting Clearances
Ambient Temperature Minimum Mounting Clearances
Frame Size Enclosure Rating
Minimum Maximum Top & Bottom Left & Right Sides
NEMA 1 2 inches (50mm)
AA 45°C
NEMA 4X 0 inches (0mm)
45°C NEMA 1 2 inches (50mm)
B
40°C NEMA 4X 2 inches (50mm) 0 inches (0mm)
-10°C (14°F)
C
D 2 inches (50mm)
45°C NEMA 1
E
F Not Required
3.2.2 Minimum Mounting Clearances
Be sure to provide proper top, bottom and side clearance per Table 3-1.
3.3 Mounting the Drive

Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical surface. Avoid mounting the drive in locations that would subject the drive to
vibration in excess of the 0.5G RMS rating (e.g. adjacent to a large punch press).
3.3.1 Protecting the Drive from Debris
Drives supplied in NEMA 1 enclosures must be protected from debris falling through the drive vents during installation and
operation. The drive is designed to operate in NEMA1 Type installations. The atmosphere must not contain airborne
particles that can collect on the internal circuitry of the drive, especially conductive particles. Drives supplied in NEMA 4X
enclosures are designed for harsh environments including dust and water. NEMA 1 and NEMA 4X drives are for indoor use
only.
Note: F-Frame Size drives are supplied with door mounted filters that are replaceable. The replacement filter part number
is available on a label next to the filter on the inside of the door. If the user desires, these filters can also be cleaned
by blowing or vacuuming out any collected debris as long as the filter media remains intact. See section 12.2 for
instructions for optionally setting the drive’s real time clock to provide an alert message or output at regular cleaning
intervals.
3.3.2 Watts Loss Data
Table 3-2 Watts Loss Data
240VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Frame Size
2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM 2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM 2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM
50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts +
AA, B, C, D, E and F
(14 W/Amp) (17 W/Amp) (17 W/Amp) (26 W/Amp) (18 W/Amp) (25 W/Amp)
Example: At 2.5kHz, a 3hp, 240VAC control draws 10Amps. Watts loss = 50W + (10x14) = 190Watts
MN764 Installing the Drive 3-1

3.4 Cover Removal (NEMA 1 Drives):
To connect power and signal wires, the cover must be removed (AA, B, C, D and E frame drives). This procedure describes
how to access all terminal connections inside the control.
1. Remove the four cover screws shown in Figure 3-1.
2. Lift and remove the cover.
3. Press in the two Cover Releases (Control) and rotate the control cover open as shown.
4. For E-frame drives, two additional screws must be removed from conduit box to gain access to the power conduit
openings.
Figure 3-1 Cover Removal

Lift and
remove cover Control
Cover
Cover
Cover
Screws Release
(4)
Cover
Release
Cover
Control
I/O Module I/O Module

Shield Slot 1 Slot 2
Screws Shield
(4) Plate
Power
Base
Power & Motor Analog/Digital

Connections I/O Terminals
Cable Entrance
Cable Clamp and
Shield Termination
3.5 Cover Removal Procedure (NEMA 4X Frames AA and B):

CAUTION: Failure to follow this procedure may result in damage to the controller cover gasket which will
cause improper sealing and inability to maintain specified NEMA 4X ratings.
1. While supporting cover, remove all cover screws reserving for usage when replacing cover.
2. Do not use any kind of tool to pry the cover away from the drive to avoid damaging the gasket or surrounding plastic.
3. Separate cover from base a short distance by pulling it away from the drive while being careful to not pull on the keypad
cable which is attached to both the cover and the control board.
4. Disconnect the keypad cable from the keypad board connector on the inside of the cover by pressing in on the retention
clip and gently pulling the cable out of the connector.
3-2 Installing the Drive MN764

3.6 Cover Replacement Procedure (NEMA 4X Frames AA and B):
CAUTION: Failure to follow this procedure may result in damage to the controller cover gasket which will
cause improper sealing and inability to maintain specified NEMA 4X ratings.
1. While holding the cover close to the controller, plug the keypad cable (disconnected in step 4 above) into the connector
on the keypad board making sure that the retention clip snaps into place.
2. Check that keypad cable is not overlapping any of the cover edges while placing cover on drive. Ensure that gasket is
seated in cover groove around the complete perimeter of the cover without any folds.
3. While holding the cover against the base, insert, start and tighten all cover screws and tighten only to the point of contact
with the cover while following the numerical sequence outlined in the diagram below.
4. Using the numerical sequence on the following figure, tighten each screw to 15 in-lbs. of torque.
5. Do not over-tighten ensuring that the cover is seated flush around complete perimeter of base.
Figure 3-2 Cover Replacement (NEMA 4X)
Maximum cover screw torque:

15 in-lbs. (see above procedure)
1 2
3 4
Maximum cover screw torque:
15 in-lbs. (see above procedure)
1 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
3 2 11 12
AA - FRAME NEMA 4X B - FRAME NEMA 4X
MN764 Installing the Drive 3-3

3-4 Installing the Drive MN764
Chapter 4
Power Wiring
4.1 Grounding the Drive
Baldor does not recommend using “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer power leads that may create ground loops. Instead
we recommend using a four wire Wye. Baldor drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase lines that are
electrically symmetrical with respect to ground. System grounding is an important step in the overall installation to prevent
problems. The recommended grounding method is shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Recommended System Grounding
Note: Motor thermal leads must be run in

separate conduit from motor power
leads.
TH1
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. Drive TH2 Note:
GND
Wiring shown for clarity of
Note: A line reactor is recommended grounding method only. Not
and must be purchased separately.
. representative of actual terminal
L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 block arrangement.
Note: An optional separately
L1 purchased load reactor is
AC Main Optional recommended.
Supply Optional
L2 Line Load
Reactor Reactor
L3
Earth
Safety
Four Wire
Ground
Wye
Driven Earth Route all 4 wires L1, L2, L3 and Earth (Ground)
Ground Rod together in conduit or shielded cable.
(Plant Ground) Ground per NEC and
Route all 4 wires T1, T2, T3 and Motor Ground together
in conduit or shielded cable. Local codes.
Connect all wires (including motor ground)
inside the motor terminal box.
4.1.1 Ungrounded Distribution System

With an ungrounded power distribution system it is possible to have a continuous current path to ground through the MOV
devices internal to the VS1SP. To avoid equipment damage, an isolation transformer with a WYE grounded secondary is
recommended. This provides three phase AC power that is symmetrical with respect to ground.
4.1.2 Input Power Conditioning

Baldor drives are designed for direct connection to standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect
to ground. An AC line reactor or an isolation transformer may be required for some power conditions.
• If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the drive has permanently connected power factor correction
capacitors, an input AC line reactor or an isolation transformer must be connected between the power factor correction
capacitors and the drive.
• If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched on
line and off line, the capacitors must not be switched while the drive is connected to the AC power line. If the capacitors
must be switched while the drive is connected to the AC power line, additional protection is required. TVSS (Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressor) of the proper rating must be installed on the drive input between the drive and any type of
input impedance such as an input reactor or drive isolation transformer.
4.2 Line Impedance

Baldor VS1SP drives require 1% line impedance minimum (3% for AA frame size drives and B Frame NEMA 4X drives). If the
impedance of the incoming power does not meet this requirement, a 3 phase line reactor can be used to provide the needed
impedance in most cases. The input impedance of the power lines can be determined as follows:
Measure the line to line voltage at no load and at full rated load.
Use these measured values to calculate impedance as follows:
Volts No Load VoltsFull Load

% Impedance = x 100
Volts No Load
MN764 Power Wiring 4-1

4.2.1 Line Reactors
Three phase line reactors are available from Baldor. The line reactor to order is based on the full load current of the motor
(FLA). If providing your own line reactor, use the following formula to calculate the minimum inductance required.
(VL- L X 0.01)
L =
(I X √3 X 377)
Where: L Minimum inductance in Henries.
V L- L Input volts measured line to line.
0.01 Desired percentage of input impedance 1%. (Note: Change this value to
0.03 for AA Frame size drives
I Input current rating of drive. and for B Frame size NEMA 4X
377 Constant used with 60 Hz power. drives.)
Use 314 if input power is 50 Hz.
4.2.2 Load Reactors
Line reactors may be used at the drive output to the motor. When used this way, they are called Load Reactors. Load
reactors serve several functions that include:
• Protect the drive from a short circuit at the motor.
• Limit the rate of rise of motor surge currents.
• Slowing the rate of change of power the drive delivers to the motor.
Load reactors should be installed as close to the drive as possible. Selection should be based on the motor nameplate FLA
value.
4.3 Line Disconnect
A power disconnect should be installed between the input power service and the drive for a fail safe method to disconnect
power. This drive will remain in a powered-up condition until all input power is removed from the drive and the internal bus
voltage is depleted.
4.4 Protective Devices
NOTE: Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must
be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.
Recommended fuse sizes are based on the following:
115% of maximum continuous drive input current for time delay.
150% of maximum continuous drive input current for Fast or Very Fast action.
Note: These recommendations do not consider harmonic currents or ambient temperatures greater than 45°C. Be sure a
suitable input power protection device is installed. Use the recommended fuses and wire sizes shown in Tables 4-1 through
4-6. Wire size is based on the use of copper conductor wire rated at 75 °C. The table is specified for NEMA B motors.
Fast Action Fuses: 240VAC, Buss® KTN
480VAC, Buss® KTS to 600A (KTU for 601 to 1200A)
600VAC, Buss® KTS to 600A (KTU for 601 to 1200A)
Very Fast Action: 240VAC, Buss® JJN
480VAC, Buss® JJS
600VAC, Buss® JJS
Time Delay: 240VAC, BUSS FRN
480VAC, BUSS FRS (KLU for 601 to 1200A)
600VAC, BUSS FRS (KLU for 601 to 1200A)
Semiconductor 240VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A50QS
Fuses: 480VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A70QS
600VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A70QS
UL Listed Breakers: Frame Size D - 250 A maximum (all ratings)
Frame Size E - 300 A maximum for the 150 HP
400 A maximum for the 200 HP
500A maximum for the 250 HP
Frame Size F - 600A maximum for the 300 HP
Buss® is a trademark of Cooper Industries, Inc.
4.5 Reduced Input Voltage Considerations
When operating with other than nominal input voltages or with non-standard motors, the output current rating of the drive
must be greater than or equal to the continuous load requirements of the motor.
4.6 Electrical Installation
All interconnection wires between the drive, AC power source, motor, host control and any other operator interface stations
should be in metal conduits or shielded cable must be used. If the connection being made is on a connection stud or
grounding screw, then use listed closed loop connectors that are of appropriate size for wire gauge being used. Connectors
are to be installed using crimp tool specified by the manufactuer of the connector. Only class 1 wiring should be used. See
Appendix A for conduit hole size for each frame size.
4-2 Power Wiring MN764

4.7 Optional Filter/Reactor
Figure 4-2 shows the connections for installing an optional Line Filter and AC Reactor.
Figure 4-2 Filter and Reactor Connections
L1 Filter L1 L1
AC L2 L2 L2
Reactor Control
Line L3 L3 L3
PE PE PE
Line Load
Table 4-1 240VAC Three Phase Wire Size and Protective Devices
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
HP Input Amps Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Time Delay Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
1 4.2 12 12 9 14 2.5
2 7.0 15 15 12 14 2.5
3 10 25 25 20 14 2.5
5 16 35 35 30 12 4.0
7.5 22 35 35 30 10 6.0
10 28 70 70 60 8 10.0
15 42 80 80 70 6 16.0
20 53 100 100 90 4 25.0
25 66 125 *125 A50QS125-4 4 25.0
30 78 175 *175 A50QS150-4 3 35.0
40 104 175 *175 A50QS150-4 2 50.0
50 130 200 200 175 2/0 70.0
60 154 250 250 200 3/0 85.0
*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.
Note: Wire sizes based on 750C copper wire. Fuses based on 400C ambient, max continuous output and no harmonic current.
Table 4-2 240VAC Three Phase Breaker Size

HP UL Listed Breaker Size
(AMPS)
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50 250
60 250

HP Input Fast Acting Fast Acting Time Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
Amps (UL) (CUL) Delay
1 2.1 6 6 4.5 14 2.5
2 3.4 8 8 6.3 14 2.5
3 4.8 12 12 10 14 2.5
5 7.6 17.5 17.5 15 14 2.5
7.5 11 25 25 17.5 14 2.5
10 14 25 25 17.5 12 4.0
15 21 40 40 35 10 5.3
20 27 50 50 45 8 10.0
25 34 60 60 50 8 10.0
30 40 80 *80 A70QS60-4 8 10.0
40 52 100 *100 A70QS80-4 6 16.0
50 65 125 *125 A70QS100-4 4 25.0
60 77 125 125 100 3 35.0
75 96 150 150 125 1 50.0
100 124 200 200 175 2/0 70.0
125 156 250 250 200 3/0 85.0
One-4/0 or One-110.0 or
150 180 350 350 300
Two-1/0 Two-55.0
200 240 450 450 400 Two-3/0 Two-85.0
250 302 600 600 450 Two-250 kcmil Two-127.0
300 361 650 650 450 Two-4/0 Two-110.0
350 414 750 750 550 Two-300 kcmil Two-152.0
400 477 800 800 600 Two-350 kcmil Two-177.0
450 534 900 900 650 Two-400 kcmil Two-203.0
500 590 1000 1000 750 Two-500 kcmil Two-253.0
550 ◊ 650 1000 1000 750 Two-600 kcmil Two-304.0
◊ This rating is applicable when using the VS1SP4500-1 in the SVT (standard variable torque) operating zone.

HP UL Listed Breaker Size
(AMPS)
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60 250
75 250
100 250
125 250
150 300
200 400
250 500
300 600
350 700
400 750
450 800
500 1000
550 1000

Input Fast Acting Fast Acting Time
HP Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
Amps (UL) (CUL) Delay
1 1.7 6 6 5 14 2.5
2 2.7 6 6 5 14 2.5
3 3.9 10 10 8 14 2.5
5 6.1 15 15 12 14 2.5
7.5 9.0 17.5 17.5 15 14 2.5
10 11 17.5 17.5 15 14 2.5
15 17 35 35 30 10 6.0
20 22 40 40 35 10 6.0
25 27 50 50 40 8 10.0
30 32 70 *70 A70QS50-4 8 10.0
40 41 80 *80 A70QS70-4 6 16.0
50 52 80 *80 A70QS80-4 6 16.0
60 62 100 100 80 4 25.0
75 77 125 125 100 3 35.0
100 99 150 150 125 1 50.0
125 125 200 200 175 2/0 70.0
150 144 300 300 250 3/0 95.0
One - 250 kcmil 150 or
200 192 350 350 300
or Two - 1/0 Two - 70
250 242 450 450 400 Two - 3/0 Two - 95
300 289 600 600 450 Two - 4/0 Two - 120


UL Listed Breaker Size UL Listed Breaker Size
HP HP
(AMPS) (AMPS)
1 40
2 50
3 60 250
5 75 250
7.5 100 250
10 125 250
15 150 250
20 200 300
25 250 400
30 300 400

4.8 Incoming Power and Motor Connections
Figure 4-3 shows the layout of the terminals on the power connectors for each size drive. All cables must be in conduits
or shielded and the conduits or shields must be grounded at the cable entrance. The brake resistor and cable must be in a
conduit or shielded if installed outside the enclosure.
Figure 4-3 Power Connections
Frame Size AA 1-Phase Input Drives Frame Size AA 3-Phase Input Drives
L1 L2 N GND R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND Motor L1 L2 L3 GND R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND Motor
R1/B+ R1/B+
Chassis Chassis
Ground Ground
Motor Thermal
Dynamic Brake
Input AC Power
Input AC Power
Motor Leads
Dynamic Brake
Motor Thermal
Motor Leads
Leads *
Leads *
Motor GND
Motor GND
Frame Size B and C Drives Frame Size D Drives
L1 L2 L3 R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND L1 L2 L3 B+/R1 R2 B-

B+/R1 T1 T2 T3
Input AC Power
Dynamic Brake
Motor Leads
Motor Thermal
Dynamic Brake
Input AC Power
Motor Leads
Leads *
TH1 TH2 GND
Ground
Motor Thermal
Leads
*
Frame Size E Drives Frame Size F Drives
Note: Thermal lead and DB Control terminal
L1 L2 L3 B+/R1 R2 B- D1 D2 GND T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND D1 D2 GND blocks mounted on left side wall.
Input AC Power DB Control Motor Thermal DB Control

Dynamic Brake
Motor Leads
Leads
*
TH1 TH2 GND B+ B- T1 T2 T3

DC BUS
Motor Leads
Ground L1 L2 L3
Motor Thermal
Leads *
Ground
Input AC Power
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2.

*Remove TH1 to TH2 jumper if Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
Note: An open circuit between TH1 and TH2 will cause an overtemperature fault.
Refer to fault/troubleshooting information in Chapter 9.
1. Access the Power and Motor Terminals (see Cover Removal procedure).
2. Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the cable entrance.
3. Connect the line L1, L2, L3 and GND to the power terminal connectors.
4. Connect motor leads to T1, T2, T3 and GND motor terminal connectors.
Note: H2E-Frame Size, 250HP and 300HP (575V) drives utilize studs for power terminations.

Figure 4-4 3 Phase Input Power Connections
*Optional components not provided with control. L1 L2 L3 Earth
1. See “Protective Devices” described previously in this section.

Note 1 *Fuses
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1, L2
and L3 for AA, B, C frame drives. For D, E and F frame drives,
size the grounding conductor per the local electrical codes. Note 3
A1 B1 C1
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the
use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt Note 4 *Optional
EMI/RFI shielding. Line
Reactor
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section. A2 B2 C2 Note 2
Note 3
L1 L2 L3 GND
Baldor
Control
4.9 Operating a 3 Phase Control on Single Phase Input Power

Single phase AC input power can be used to power the control instead of three phase for control sizes AA, B and C. The
specifications and control sizes are listed in Appendix A of this manual. If single phase power is to be used, the rated
Horsepower of the control must be reduced (derated). In addition, power wiring and jumper changes are required. Both
connection types are shown in Figures 4-5 and 4-6.
Single phase rating wire size and protection devices are listed in Tables 4-7 and 4-8.
4.9.1 Single Phase Power Derating:

Single phase power derating requires that the continuous and peak current ratings of the control be reduced by the
following:
1. 1 - 7.5HP 240 and 480VAC controls:
Derate output hp to the next lower hp value (i.e. 7.5hp becomes 5hp, etc.)
2. 10 - 50HP 240 and 480VAC controls:
Derate output hp by 50% of the nameplate rating.
Table 4-7 Single Phase Wire Size and Protection Devices - 240VAC Controls
Drive Derated Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
HP HP Input Amps Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
2 1 8.0 12 12 14 2.5
3 2 10 20 20 14 2.5
5 3 15 25 25 12 4.0
7.5 5 28 45 45 10 6.0
10 5 28 45 45 12 4.0
15 7.5 40 60 60 8 10.0
20 10 50 80 80 6 16.0
25 10 50 80 *80 A50QS125-4 6 16.0
30 15 68 100 *100 A50QS150-4 4 25.0
40 20 88 125 *125 A50QS150-4 3 35.0


Table 4-8 Single Phase Wire Size and Protection Devices - 480VAC Controls
Drive Derated Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
HP HP Input Amps Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
2 1 4.0 6 6 14 2.5
3 2 6.0 10 10 14 2.5
5 3 8.5 15 15 14 2.5
7.5 5 14 20 20 14 2.5
10 5 14 20 20 14 2.5
15 7.5 20 30 30 12 4.0
20 10 25 40 40 10 6.0
25 10 25 40 40 10 6.0
30 15 34 50 *50 A70QS50-4 8 10.0
40 20 44 60 *60 A70QS60-4 8 10.0
50 25 55 80 *80 A70QS80-4 6 16.0

Frames D, E and F drives cannot be applied with a single phase power source.
Figure 4-5 Size AA Single Phase Power Connections to a 3 Phase Control
Single Phase 3 Wire Connections Single Phase 2 Wire Connections
L1 L2 L1 Neutral
Earth Earth
Note 1 *Fuse
* Fuses In order to protect the drive,
Level 2, Drive Configure, Power
Note 3 Input P2110 should be set to
A1 “Single Phase”.
A1 B1
Note 2 *Optional
Note 4 * Optional Line
Line Reactor
Reactor
A2
A2 B2
Note 3
L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 L3 GND
Baldor Baldor
Control Control
Notes:
1. See Protective Devices described previously in this section.
* Optional components are not provided with control.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1 and L2.
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. 3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of
a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section.
Line Reactors are built-in for size B and larger controls.

Figure 4-6 Size B and C Single Phase Power Connections to a 3 Phase Control
Single Phase 3 Wire Connections Single Phase 2 Wire Connections
L1 L2 L1 Neutral
Earth Earth
Note 1 * Fuse In order to protect the drive,

* Fuses
Level 2, Drive Configure, Power
Input P2110 should be set to
Note 3 “Single Phase”.
A1
A1 B1
Note 2 * Optional
Note 4 *Optional Line
Line Reactor
Reactor
A2
A2 B2 IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:
Note 3 Do not connect L3. Do not connect L3.
L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 L3 GND
Baldor Baldor
Control Control
Notes:
1. See Protective Devices described previously in this section.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1 and L2.
*Optional components not provided with control.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
Line Reactors are built-in for size B and larger controls.
Single Phase Power and Motor Connections VS1SP6XX-XX

Figure 4-7 shows the minimum connections required at the power connector. All cables must be in conduits or shielded
and the conduits or shields must be grounded at the cable entrance. The brake resistor and cable must be in a conduit or
shielded if installed outside the enclosure.
Figure 4-7 Single Phase Control Power Terminals
Frame Size AA
L1 L2 N GND R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND

R1/B+ Motor
Input AC Dynamic Motor Chassis
Motor Thermal
Ground
Leads *
Power Brake Leads

Motor GND

*Remove TH1 to TH2 jumper if Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
Note: An open circuit between TH1 and TH2 will be used by the drive to generate a motor overtemperature fault. Refer to
the fault/troubleshooting information provided in Chapter 9.
1. Access the Power and Motor Terminals (see Cover Removal procedure).
2. Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the cable entrance.
3. Connect the line L1, L2, N and GND to the power terminal connections, Figure 4-7.
4. Connect motor leads to T1, T2, T3 and GND motor terminal connectors.

Figure 4-8 Single Phase Power Control Connections
120VAC Single Phase 240VAC Single Phase

L1 N Earth L1 L2 Earth
Note 1 *Fuses Note 1 *Fuses
Note 3 Note 3
A1 A1 B1
Note 4 *Optional *Optional

Line Note 4
Line
Reactor Reactor
A2 Note 2 A2 B2
Note 3 Note 2
Note 3
L1 L2 N GND L1 L2 N GND
Baldor Baldor
Control Control

Notes:
1. See Table 4-6.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1, L2 and N.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of a reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI
shielding.
Table 4-9 Single Phase Rating Wire Size and Protection Devices - 120/240VAC Controls
120VAC Single Phase Input 240VAC Single Phase Input
HP Input Input Fuse (Amps) Input Input Fuse (Amps)
AWG mm2 AWG mm2
Amps Fast Acting Amps Fast Acting
1 12 20 12 4.0 6.3 12 14 2.5
2 20 30 10 6.0 10.2 20 14 2.5
3 30 35 10 6.0 14.4 25 12 4.0
Note: All wire sizes are based on 750C copper wire. Recommended fuses are based on 400C ambient, maximum continuous
control output and no harmonic current.

4.10 M-Contactor
If required by local codes or for safety reasons, an M-Contactor (motor circuit contactor) may be installed. However,
incorrect installation or failure of the M-Contactor or wiring may damage the control.
M-Contactor connections are shown in Figure 4-9.
CAUTION: If an M-Contactor is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 200msec before the
M-Contactor is opened. If the M-Contactor is opened while the control is supplying voltage and
current to the motor, the control may be damaged. Before the control is enabled, the M-Contactor
must be closed for at least 200msec.
Figure 4-9 Motor Connections and Optional Connections
Baldor
Control
T1 T2 T3 GND
*Optional M Contactor Connections

M
* Optional
To Power Source * M-Contactor RC Device
Note 1 M
(Rated Coil Voltage) Electrocube
A1 B1 C1
RG1781-3
* J2
Note 2 *Optional
Load M Enable
Reactor 8
A2 B2 C2 9
Note 1 *M=Aux Contacts of optional M-Contactor
Note 3
T2 T3
T1 G See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2.
*AC Motor
Notes:
1. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of the Load Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI
shielding.
3. Use same gauge wire for ground as for T1, T2 and T3 for AA, B, and C controls. For size D, E and F controls, size the
grounding conductor per the local electrical code.
4.11 Long Motor Leads

The wire leads that connect the motor to the control are critical in terms of sizing, shielding and the cable characteristics.
Short cable runs are usually trouble free but fault-monitoring circuitry can produce numerous faults when long cables (over
100 feet) are used.
• 100+ft (30m): Baldor recommends adding an optional load reactor to the output of the control
• 250+ft (75m): Baldor recommends adding and optional load reactor and common mode choke to the control.
The load reactor and/or common mode choke should be placed in close physical proximity to the control. Unexpected
faults may occur due to excessive charging current required for motor cable capacitance. If you use long motor leads and
experience unexpected trips due to overload conditions and are not sure how to correctly size and connect the optional load
reactors, contact your Baldor representative.

4.12 Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware
Refer to Figure 4-10 for DB resistor connections. Dynamic Brake (DB) hardware must be installed on a flat, non-flammable,
vertical surface for effective cooling and operation.
CAUTION: Before external Dynamic Brake Hardware is added, the internal resistor must be disconnected
(frames AA, B, C and D). Remove the resistor from the B+/R1 and R2 terminals. The external
resistor can be connected across these terminals. Failure to remove the internal resistor will
decrease the total resistance (parallel connection) and cause damage.
Figure 4-10 DB Terminal Identification
AA, B - NEMA 1, D and E Sizes B - NEMA 4X and C Size Only Disconnect Internal
DB resistor wires from DBR1 and DBR2 terminals
“1B” before connecting external DB Resistor to prevent damage.
B+ / R1 R2 B-
DBR1
DBR2
External
TB101
B+ / R1 R2 B-
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. External
Notes:
1. Wires from the internal Dynamic Brake resistor for size AA, B, C and D controls must be removed before external resistor
hardware is installed.
2. E and F size drives do not include an internal Dynamic Brake resistor may not include the transistor.
3. Although not shown, metal conduit should be used to shield all power wires and motor leads.
E-Frame and F-Frame Sizes

An internal dynamic braking transistor is not included on standard VS1SP E-Frame and F-Frame drives (note that the VS1GV
E-Frame and F-Frame drives up to 450 HP do include an internal transistor, but not a resistor). To accommodate braking
on VS1SP E-Frame and F-Frame drives, control terminals are provided that may be used to control an external braking
transistor such as a Baldor RTA or RBA assembly. See manual MN701 for more details on these external options. Figure
4-11 shows the braking control terminals provided on the E-Frame and F-Frame drives. Figure 4-12 shows an example
utilizing a Baldor RTA assembly with a Baldor RGA resistor.
Figure 4-11 E-Frame and F-Frame Brake Terminal Identification
D1 D2 GND

Figure 4-12 Wiring for RTA Assembly
Control Shielded DB Assembly

Terminals
Twisted Pair Terminals
D1 D1
D2 D2
Optional
Dynamic Brake
(RTA)
(May be labeled GND or a )
GND
B- B-
B+ B+
MOTOR
T3 R1 R2
T3
GND T2 T2
T1
T1
R1 R2
L3 Optional
50/60 Hz
3 Phase RGA
L2 Assembly
Power
L1
Optional Customer Supplied See recommended terminal

GND
Breaker or Fuse Protection - tightening torques in Table A-2.
Subject to Local Codes

Chapter 5
Control Wiring
5.1 Control Board Connections
The analog and digital inputs and output terminals are shown in Figure 5-1. The signals are described in Tables 5-1, 5-2
and 5-3. Connections will depend upon which of the operating modes are chosen. Each mode described and a connection
diagram is provided later in this section.
Figure 5-1 Control I/O Connections
Connector
USB Activity LED
J3
Heartbeat/
Fault LED 21
Board
USB Port Plug
J2
1
8 Terminals 8 to 20 (J2)
J1 8 Enable Input
1 9 Digital Input 1
10 Digital Input 2 Terminals 21 to 30 (J3)
11 Digital Input 3 21 External User +24V Return
12 Digital Input 4 22 External User +24V
Terninals 1 to 7 (J1) 23 Internal +24V
1 User Analog Return 13 Digital Input 5
14 Digital Input 6 24 Internal +24V Return
2 Analog Input 1 25 Relay Out 1 NC
3 Analog Ref. Power 15 Digital Input 7
16 Digital Input 8 26 Relay Out 1 COM
4 Analog Input 2 + 27 Relay Out 1 NO
5 Analog Input 2 - 17 Digital Out 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Out 1 - (Emitter) 28 Relay Out 2 NC
6 Analog Output 1 29 Relay Out 2 COM
7 Analog Output 2 19 Digital Out 2 + (Collector)
20 Digital Out 2 - (Emitter) 30 Relay Out 2 NO
Table 5-1 J1 Connector Definition

Connector Terminal Signal Description
J1-1 0VDC - Common reference for Analog Inputs and Outputs
J1-2 AIN1 – Analog Input 1
J1-3 AREF - Analog reference power (+10V for Analog Input 1)
J1-4 AIN2+ - Analog Input 2+
J1-5 AIN2- - Analog Input 2-
J1-6 AOUT1 - Analog Output 1
J1-7 AOUT2 - Analog Output 2

MN764 Control Wiring 5-1

J2-8 Enable Input
J2-9 DIN1 – Digital Input 1
J2-17 Digital Output #1+ (Collector)
J2-18 Digital Output #1- (Emitter)
J2-19 Digital Output #2+ (Collector)
J2-20 Digital Output #2- (Emitter)

J3-21 External User +24V Return
J3-22 External User +24V
J3-23 Internal +24VDC
J3-24 Internal +24VDC Return
J3-25 Relay Output #1 N.C.
J3-26 Relay Output #1 COMMON
J3-27 Relay Output #1 N.O.
J3-28 Relay Output #2 N.C.
J3-29 Relay Output #2 COMMON
J3-30 Relay Output #2 N.O.
5-2 Control Wiring MN764

5.2 Analog Inputs
Two analog inputs are available: Analog Input 1 (J1-1 and J1-2) and Analog Input 2 (J1-4 and J1-5) as shown in Figure 5-2.
Either analog input may be selected in the Level 1 Input block, Command Source Parameter.
Figure 5-2 Analog Inputs
J1
Analog GND
1
Command Pot or Analog Input 1
2 Analog Input 1
0 - 10VDC Pot Reference
3
±5VDC, ±10VDC, Analog Input +2
4
0-20mA or 4-20mA Input Analog Input -2 Analog Input 2
5
See recommended terminal tightening torques in Table A-2.
5.2.1 Analog Input 1 (Single Ended)

When using a potentiometer as the speed command, process feedback or setpoint source, the potentiometer should be
connected at Analog Input 1. When using Analog Input 1, the respective parameter must be set to “Analog Input 1”.
Note: A potentiometer value of 5kΩ to 10kΩ, 0.5 watt may be used.
Parameter Selection
The single ended Analog Input 1 is typically used in one of three ways:
1. Speed or Torque command (Level 1 Input block, Command Source=Analog Input 1).
2. Process Feedback (Level 2 Process Control block, Process Feedback=Analog Input 1).
3. Setpoint Source (Level 2 Process Control block, Setpoint Source=Analog Input 1).
5.2.2 Analog Input 2 (Differential)

Analog Input 2 accepts a differential command ±5VDC, ±10VDC, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA.
If pin J1-4 is positive with respect to pin 5 and P1408=±5V or ±10V, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
If pin J1-4 is negative with respect to pin 5 and P1408=±5V or ±10V, the motor will rotate in the reverse direction. If forward
direction is not correct, change Level 2, Motor Data Reverse Rotation parameter P2415.
Analog Input 2 can be connected for single ended operation by connecting either of the differential terminals to common,
provided the common mode voltage range is not exceeded.
Analog Input 2 can be set for voltage or current mode operation. With JP1 as shown in Figure 5-3, Voltage mode is selected.
If JP1 is connected to pins 2 and 3, current mode is selected.
The Level 1 Input Setup Parameter P1408 can be set to the full scale voltage or current range desired.
Note: The common mode voltage can be measured with a voltmeter. Apply the maximum command voltage to Analog
Input 2 (J1-4,5). Measure the AC and DC voltage across J1-1 to J1-4. Add the AC and DC values. Measure the AC and DC
voltage from J1-1 to J1-5. Add these AC and DC values.
If either of these measurement totals exceeds a total of ±15 volts, then the common mode voltage range has been
exceeded. To correct this condition, isolate the command signal with a signal isolator, such as Baldor catalog number
BC145.
Figure 5-3 Jumper Locations
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. RS485 RS485 JP3
120 ohm
Regen Ribbon Termination 1
Keypad S G A B S
Connector Cable 1 JP3
P3 No Termination
Connector 1
J7 J8
P2 Type ANAIN2 ANAOUT1

Control JP6 JP1 JP2
Circuit Board ENP INP
Factory Settings
P1 JP1 JP2 Voltage
JP5 as shown
EPN DFT 1 1
Fault 1 1
Current
USB Port USB 8 24
1 1
Note: Factory connection of

J1 J2 J3 J2-8 (Enable) to J3-24.

5.3 Analog Outputs
Two programmable analog outputs are provided on J1-6 and J1-7. These outputs are scaled and can be used to provide
status of various control conditions. The return for these outputs is J1-1 analog return. Each output function is programmed
in the Level 1 Output block, Analog Out1 Signal or Analog Out2 Signal parameter values.
Analog Output 1 can be set for voltage or current mode operation. With JP2 as shown in Figure 5-3, Voltage mode is
selected. If JP2 is connected to pins 2 and 3, current mode is selected.
The Level 1 Output Setup Parameter P1510 can be set to the full scale voltage or current range desired.
5.4 Opto-Isolated Inputs

Logic input connections are made at terminal strip J2 pins 8 to 16. J2 inputs can be wired as Active High or Active Low as
shown in Figure 5-4. Internal or external power source is selected by jumpers JP5 and JP6 shown in Figure 5-4.
Notes for Figure 5-4:

1. See operating modes defined later in this chapter for input usage.
2. Factory connection of J2-8 (Enable) is made to J3-24 for Internal, Active Low connection. For other configurations, the
wire at J3-24 must be moved to J3-23, J3-21 or J3-22 as needed.
Figure 5-4 Active HIGH (Sourcing)/LOW (Sinking) Relationship
Internally Supplied 24VDC Externally Supplied 24VDC

Active High Connections Active Low Connections Active High Connections Active Low Connections
(Factory Default Settings)
JP6 JP6 JP6 JP6
ENP INP *ENP INP ENP INP ENP INP
JP5 JP5 JP5 JP5

EPN DFT *EPN DFT EPN DFT EPN DFT
J2 J2 J2 J2
8 Enable 8 Enable 8 Enable 8 Enable
9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1
J3 J3 J3 J3
21 External User Return 21 External User Return 21 External User Return 21 External User Return
22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V
23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V
24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return
Source Sink Source Sink
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. User Provided User Provided
+ 24V Power Source + 24V Power Source

5.5 Operating Modes
The operating modes define the basic motor control setup and the operation of the input and output terminals. After the
circuit connections are completed, the operating mode is selected by programming the Operating Mode parameter in the
Level 1 Input Setup Programming Block (P1401).
Operating modes include:

• Keypad • Standard Run 2Wire • Standard Run 3Wire • 15 Preset Speeds
• Fan Pump 2Wire • Fan Pump 3Wire • Process Control* • 3 Sps Ana 2Wire
• 3 Spd Ana 3Wire • Electronic Pot 2Wire • Electronic Pot 3Wire • Network
• Profile Run* • Bipolar • Pulse Follower* • PLC*
*To view and change parameters associated with these modes, Operating Mode (P1401) must be set to the respective
mode. For example, this means Process Control parameters will not appear on the keypad for selection unless Level 1, Input
Setup, Operating Mode (P1401) is set to “Process Control”.
Each mode requires connections to the J1, J2 and J3 terminal strips. The terminal strips are shown in Figure 5-1. The
connection of each input or output signal is described in the following pages.
5.5.1 Keypad
The Keypad mode allows the control to be operated from the keypad. In this mode only the Enable input is required.
However, the Stop and External Trip inputs may optionally be used. All other Digital Inputs remain inactive. The Analog
Outputs and Digital Outputs remain active at all times.
Figure 5-5 Keypad Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable
8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ (Optional Stop) 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 13 Digital Input 5
15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 5-4 for 19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector)
connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8.
For keypad operation, only Enable (J2-8) is required.
J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.

OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to stop.
J2-11 Optional STOP input (not required).
CLOSED allows normal control operation.
OPEN motor coasts or brakes to stop if Level 1 Keypad Setup block, Local Hot Start parameter is set to “ON”.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

5.5.2 Standard Run 2Wire
In Standard Run 2Wire mode, the control is operated by the digital inputs and the command source. Also, Preset Speed 1
can be selected. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-6 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-6 Standard Run 2Wire Connection Diagram

J2
J1 * Enable 8 Enable
1 User Analog Return Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
10K Ω Pot or 2 Analog Input 1 Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
0 - 10VDC 3 Analog Ref. Power + Jog Forward 11 Digital Input 3
4 Analog Input 2+ Jog Reverse 12 Digital Input 4
5 Analog Input 2- Accel/Decel Select 13 Digital Input 5
6 Analog Output 1 Preset Speed 1 14 Digital Input 6
7 Analog Output 2 Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
J2-8 CLOSED allows normal operation.

OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop. If Level 1, Keypad Setup, Stop Mode is set to “coast”, motor coasts to stop.
J2-10 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
J2-11 CLOSED starts motor JOG operation in the Forward direction.
J2-12 CLOSED starts motor JOG operation in the Reverse direction.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC / S-DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC / S-DEC group 1.
J2-14 CLOSED selects Preset Speed #1 (J2-11 or 12 will override this Preset Speed).
OPEN allows speed command from the command source (P1402).
J2-15 CLOSED to reset fault.
OPEN to run.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control.
Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20mA etc.) and forward or reverse are closed, motion will
occur (unless both are closed at the same time).

5.5.3 Standard Run 3Wire
In Standard Run 3Wire mode, the control is operated by the digital inputs and the command source. Also, Preset Speed 1
can be selected. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-7 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-7 Standard Run 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
10K Ω Pot or 2 Analog Input 1 Forward Start Digital Input 1
9
0 - 10VDC 3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Start 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop Digital Input 3
11
5 Analog Input 2- Jog 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Preset Speed 1 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
See Figure 5-4 for 18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
connection Information. 19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector)

J2-9 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
In JOG mode (J2-12 CLOSED), motor jogs in the Forward direction as long as closed.
J2-10 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
In JOG mode (J2-12 CLOSED), motor jogs in the Reverse direction as long as closed.
J2-11 MOMENTARY OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-12 CLOSED places control in JOG mode, Forward and Reverse run are used to jog the motor.
J2-14 CLOSED selects Preset Speed #1 (J2-12 will override this Preset Speed).
OPEN allows speed command from the command source (P1402).
J2-15 CLOSED to reset fault.
OPEN to run.

5.5.4 15 Preset Speeds
Operation in 15 Preset Speeds 2-Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2. The values of the Preset Speeds
are set in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed 1 to Preset Speed 15. J2-11 through J2-14 inputs allow selection
of 15 Preset Speeds. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-8 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-8 15 Preset Speeds
J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Switch 1 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Switch 2 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Switch 3 13 Digital Input 5
Accel/Decel 15 Digital Input 7
connection information. 19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector)

J2-9 CLOSED operates the motor in the Forward direction (with J2-10 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-10 CLOSED operates motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
J2-11 thru J2-14 Selects programmed Preset Speeds as defined in Table 5-4.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip
to “ON”. CLOSED allows normal operation.
Table 5-4 Switch Truth Table for 15 Speed, 2Wire Control Mode
J2-11 J2-12 J2-13 J2-14 Function
OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 1 (P1001)
CLOSED OPEN OPEN OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 2 (P1002)
OPEN CLOSED OPEN OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 3 (P1003)
CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 4 (P1004)
OPEN OPEN CLOSED OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 5 (P1005)
CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 6 (P1006)
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 7 (P1007)
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED OPEN Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 8 (P1008)
OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 9 (P1009)
CLOSED OPEN OPEN CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 10 (P1010)
OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 11 (P1011)
CLOSED CLOSED OPEN CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 12 (P1012)
OPEN OPEN CLOSED CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 13 (P1013)
CLOSED OPEN CLOSED CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 14 (P1014)
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 15 (P1015)
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Fault Reset

5.5.5 Fan Pump 2Wire
Operation in the Fan Pump 2-Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2-8 through J2-16. The opto inputs can
be switches as shown in Figure 5-9 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-9 Fan Pump 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
4 Analog Input 2+ Analog Input Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run Command 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Speed Command 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Firestat 14 Digital Input 6
Freezestat 15 Digital Input 7
connections information. 19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector)

OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
OPEN motor decels to stop. Note: J2-9 and J2-10 are both closed = Fault Reset.
J2-10 CLOSED operates the motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop. Note: J2-9 and J2-10 are both closed = Fault Reset.
J2-11 CLOSED selects Analog Input 1 (if J2-13, J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
OPEN selects Command Source (Level 1, Input, Command Source) if J2-13, J2-14 and J2-15 are closed.
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED allows other selections, see Speed Select Table 5-5 .
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad (if J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
Note: When changing from Terminal Strip to Keypad (J2-12 or J2-13) the motor speed and direction will remain
the same after the change.
J2-14 Firestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 1.
J2-15 Freezestat. Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 2 (if J2-14 is closed).
Table 5-5 Speed Select Table – Fan Pump 2Wire

J2-11 J2-13 J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED Keypad Speed Command
OPEN Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 1
CLOSED OPEN Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 2
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter P1402)
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Analog Input 1

5.5.6 Fan Pump 3Wire
Operation in the Fan Pump 3-Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2-8 through J2-16. The opto inputs can
be switches as shown in Figure 5-10 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-10 Fan Pump 3Wire Connection

J1 J2
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Start 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Start 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop 11 Digital Input 3
7 Analog Output 2 Firestat 14 Digital Input 6
Freezestat 15 Digital Input 7

Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED allows other selections, see Speed Select Table 5-6.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad (if J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
J2-14 Firestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 1.
J2-15 Freezestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 2 (if J2-14 is closed).
Table 5-6 Speed Select Table – Fan Pump 3Wire

J2-13 J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 1
CLOSED CLOSED OPEN Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed 2
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED Keypad Speed Command
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter P1402)

5.5.7 Process Control
The process control mode provides an auxiliary closed loop general purpose PID set point control. The process control loop
may be configured in various ways and detailed descriptions of the Process Control are given in MN707 “Introduction to
Process Control”. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-11 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-11 Process Control Connections
J1 J2
* Enable
Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
2 Analog Input 1 Reverse Enable
3 Analog Ref. Power + 10 Digital Input 2
Table Select 11 Digital Input 3
4 Analog Input 2+ Speed/Torque
Process Mode Enable 13 Digital Input 5
6 Analog Output 1 Jog

J2-9 CLOSED to enable operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN to disable Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward speed command is still present).
Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
J2-10 CLOSED to enable operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse speed command is still present).
Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
Note: If J2-9 and J2-10 are both opened, the drive will decel to a stop.
J2-11 CLOSED = TABLE 2,
OPEN = TABLE 1. Refer to Table 5-7.
Note: The Operating Mode (P1401) must be set to a mode that allows table switching in both tables T1 and T2.
J2-12 CLOSED Selects ACC/DEC group 2 (V/F) or selects torque mode (Vector).
OPEN Selects ACC/DEC group 1 (V/F) or selects speed mode (Vector).
Note: If a stop command is issued while in the torque (current) mode, the control will stop but will not maintain
position (zero current). This is different than zero speed operation for the velocity mode.
J2-13 CLOSED to enable PID and FF. Feedforward (FF) is from Command Source (P1402).
OPEN to enable FF only.
PID is disabled with its integrator reset to zero.
J2-14 CLOSED to enable JOG mode. Jog in either direction is allowed if enabled by J2-9 or J2-10.
J2-15 CLOSED to reset a fault.
OPEN to run.
Table 5-7 Table Select – Process Control

J2-11 Command
OPEN Selects Parameter Table 1
CLOSED Selects Parameter Table 2
Note: See multiple parameter sets in this section.

5.5.8 3 Speed Analog 2Wire
Provides 2 wire input control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds. The values of the Preset Speeds are set in the Level 1
Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1, Preset Speed #2 and Preset Speed #3. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in
Figure 5-12 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-12 3 Speed Analog 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
Reverse Run Digital Input 2
3 Analog Ref. Power + 10
4 Analog Input 2+ Analog Input Select 11 Digital Input 3
Switch 2 15 Digital Input 7

J2-10 CLOSED operates the motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
J2-11 CLOSED selects Analog Input 1.
OPEN selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
Note: If Command Source (Level 1 Input block) is set to Analog Input 1, then Analog Input 1 is always selected
regardless of this switch position.
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset Commands from the terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset Commands from the keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad.
J2-14 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 5-8).
Table 5-8 Speed Select Table

J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter P1402)
CLOSED OPEN Preset 1
OPEN CLOSED Preset 2
CLOSED CLOSED Preset 3
Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20mA, etc.) and forward run or reverse run is closed,
motion will occur (unless both forward run and reverse run are closed at the same time).

5.5.9 3 Speed Analog 3Wire
Provides 3 wire input control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds. The values of the Preset Speeds are set in the Level 1
Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1, Preset Speed #2 and Preset Speed #3. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in
Figure 5-13 3 Speed Analog 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2

J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset Commands from the terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset Commands from the keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad.

J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter P1402)
CLOSED OPEN Preset 1

5.5.10 E-POT 2Wire
Provides speed Increase and Decrease inputs to allow E-POT (Electronic Potentiometer) operation with 2 wire inputs. The
values of the Preset Speeds are set in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1 or Preset Speed #2. The opto
inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-14 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-14 E-POT 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
* Enable 8 Enable
1 User Analog Return
4 Analog Input 2+ Switch 1 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Switch 2 12 Digital Input 4
7 Analog Output 2 Increase 14 Digital Input 6
Decrease 15 Digital Input 7

J2-9 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
J2-10 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC /S-DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC /S-DEC group 1.
J2-14 MOMENTARY CLOSED increases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-15 MOMENTARY CLOSED decreases motor speed while contact is closed.

J2-11 J2-12 Command
OPEN OPEN Electronic Pot
CLOSED OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter P1402)

5.5.11 E-POT 3Wire
Provides speed Increase and Decrease inputs to allow E-POT operation with 3 wire inputs. The opto inputs can be switches
as shown in Figure 5-15 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-15 E-POT 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
User Analog Return * Enable
1 8 Enable
5 Analog Input 2- E-POT CMD Select 12 Digital Input 4
7 Analog Output 2 Increase 14 Digital Input 6
Decrease 15 Digital Input 7

J2-12 CLOSED selects Level 1 Command Source parameter value.
OPEN selects E-POT.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC /S-DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S-ACC /S-DEC group 1.
J2-14 MOMENTARY CLOSED increases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-15 MOMENTARY CLOSED decreases motor speed while contact is closed.

5.5.12 Network
Provides bipolar speed or torque control. Preset speeds are set in software. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in
Figure 5-16 Network Connection Diagram
J1 J2
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ 11 Digital Input 3
15 Digital Input 7

OPEN to disable Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Network Forward command is still present).
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Network Reverse command is still present).
Table 5-11 Modbus Coils that Affect this Mode

Coil Coil
2 Torque Mode (Vector Only) 35 Network Reference Source
3 Speed Mode 42 Select Acc/Dec Group 1
10 Process Torque (Vector Only) 43 Select Acc/Dec Group 2
11 Process Velocity 78 Stop, stops the motor
13 Network Current Limiting 79 Forward Run (terminal J2-9 must also be true)
15 Jog Mode 80 Reverse Run ( terminal J2-10 must also be true)
33 Keypad Reference Source (local) 81 Bipolar Mode (terminals J2-9 and J2-10 must also be true)
Network Drive enable and drive hardware enable (terminal
34 Terminal Block Reference Source (remote) 82
J2-8) must both be set else drive is disabled

5.5.13 Profile Run
Provides a speed profile consisting of seven segments to setup a cyclic operation or test cycle. The opto inputs can be
switches as shown in Figure 5-17 or logic signals from another device. Speed settings for Speed curve 1 to speed curve 7
are Preset Speed 1 to Preset Speed 7. See level 3, Profile Run block for more information.
Figure 5-17 Profile Run Connection Diagram
J1 J2
4 Analog Input 2+ Cycle 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run 12 Digital Input 4
Reset 15 Digital Input 7

OPEN to disable Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward profile run command is still present).
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse profile run command is still present).
J2-11 CLOSED runs the profile for an indefinite number of cycles. When the Level 3, Profile Run, Number of Cycles
(P3001) cycle count is reached, the counter is reset and the mode restarts (continuous cycling).
Example: If P3001 = 5 the profile runs 5 times, the counter is reset to zero, and will begin running 5 more cycles
immediately. As long as pin 11 is closed it will keep resetting the count to zero every time the number of cycles is
reached.
OPEN cycle mode is terminated when cycle count is reached.
J2-12 CLOSED uses Run Command from J2-9 or J2-10.
OPEN uses Run Command from Keypad.
J2-13 Not used.
J2-14 Not used.
J2-15 CLOSED resets an alarm or fault.
OPEN normal operation.

5.5.14 Bipolar
Provides bipolar speed or torque control (torque control is only available in Vector mode). Preset Speeds are set in software,
the control is operated by the digital inputs and the command source. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure
5-18 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-18 Bipolar Connection Diagram

J1
User Analog Return Open Loop Vector Mode
1
2 Analog Input 1 J2
3 Analog Ref. Power + * Enable 8 Enable
4 Analog Input 2 + Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
5 Analog Input 2 - Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
7 Analog Output 2 Speed Torque 12 Digital Input 4
V/F Mode Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
J2 External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
* Enable 8 Enable
Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1 17 Digital Output 1 +
Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2 See Figure 5-4 for 18 Digital Output 1 -
connection information. 19 Digital Output 2 +
11 Digital Input 3 20 Digital Output 2 -
12 Digital Input 4
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8 See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2.
17 Digital Output 1 + *Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and
See Figure 5-4 for 18 Digital Output 1 - J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8.
connection information. 19 Digital Output 2 +
20 Digital Output 2 -

J2-9 CLOSED to enable operation in Forward direction.
OPEN to disable Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward reference command is still
present). Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse reference command is still
present). Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
Note: If J2-9 and J2-10 are both opened, the drive will decel to a stop.
J2-12 CLOSED puts the control in torque command mode, Vector modes only.
OPEN puts the control in speed (velocity) command mode.
Note: If a stop command is issued while in the torque (current) mode, the control will stop but will not
maintain position (zero current). This is different than zero speed operation for the velocity mode.
J2-13 & J2-14 Select from four parameter tables as defined in Table 5-12.
J2-15 Momentary CLOSED to reset fault condition.
OPEN allows normal operation.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip
to “ON”.
Table 5-12 Bipolar Mode Table Select Truth Table

J2-13 J2-14 Function
OPEN OPEN Parameter Table 1 (T1)
CLOSED OPEN Parameter Table 2 (T2)
OPEN CLOSED Parameter Table 3 (T3)
CLOSED CLOSED Parameter Table 4 (T4)
Note: See multiple parameter sets in this section.

Bipolar - Multiple Parameter Sets
The following procedure allows you to program up to four complete sets of parameter values and to use these multiple
parameter sets. Each parameter table must be properly initialized before use. Each table must have an operating mode
that supports table switching (Process Control, Bipolar or Network) and all motor data and related parameters must be the
same in each table if switching tables with the drive enabled. When programming each parameter set, use the ENTER key to
accept and automatically save parameter values.
Note: The control can be programmed in the REMOTE mode with the drive enabled. The control must be disabled to
change the operating mode parameter. The operating mode is not stored with the other parameters in a parameter table.
1. If this is a new installation, do this procedure after the Pre-Operation Checklist and Power-Up Procedures at the end of
this section.
2. Set the Level 1 INPUT block, Operating Mode parameter value to BIPOLAR in each of the parameter sets.
3. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 1 (both switches open). Be sure switches J2-8, J2-9 and J2-10 are
OPEN. Select Basic Parameters from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including Calc Motor Model. This
creates and saves the first parameter set which is numbered Table 1.
4. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 2. Be sure switches J2-8, J2-9 and J2-10 are OPEN. Select Basic
Parameters from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including Calc Motor Model. This creates and saves the
second parameter set which is numbered Table 2.
Parameters from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including Calc Motor Model. This creates and saves the
third parameter set which is numbered Table 3.
Parameters from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including Calc Motor Model. This creates and saves the final
parameter set which is numbered Table 4.
7. Remember that to change the value of a parameter in one of the parameter tables, you must first select the table using
the switches. You cannot change a value in a table until you have first selected that table.
Note: The active parameter table is selected by Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table P0052.
Example:
Before attempting to switch parameter tables during operation “on the fly” using the digital inputs J2-13 & 14, the operating
mode for each parameter table to be used must be initialized. Specifically, to switch from Table 1 to Table 2 then back to
Table 1 both parameter Table 1 and parameter Table 2 must have operating modes that support table switching. Otherwise,
once the switch occurs, switching back will not be possible.
To illustrate this, prior to running Bipolar Mode perform the following steps:
1. Use the keypad, set Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table to 0 “Table 1”.
2. Go to Level One and set Level 1:Input Setup:Operating Mode to Bipolar.
Repeat the above steps but this time for Table 2.
3. Use the keypad, set Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table to 1 “Table 2”.
4. Go to Level One and set Level 1: Input Setup:Operating Mode to Bipolar.
The drive is now properly configured to switch between parameter Table 1 and Table 2.

5.5.15 Pulse Follower
Provides encoder following (velocity mode only) of a control from an upstream pulse reference.
This mode requires expansion board EXBHH007 and its operation is described in MN755.
5.5.16 PLC
Provides control from a PLC device (Programmable Logic Control) as described in Chapter 10 of this manual. Preset speeds
are set in software. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 5-19 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 5-19 PLC Connection Diagram
J1 J2
User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
1
3 Analog Ref. Power + See Figure 5-4 for 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2 + connection information. 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2 - Optional 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Inputs 13 Digital Input 5
One input must be a direction 15 Digital Input 7
input (FWD or REV). 16 Digital Input 8
5.6 Digital Outputs

Digital Outputs 1 and 2 are opto isolated. Internal supply or a customer provided external power source may be used as
shown in Figure 5-20. The maximum voltage from Digital Output to common when active is 1.0 VDC.
If the Digital Outputs are used to directly drive a relay, a flyback diode rated at 1A, 100V (IN4002 or equivalent) minimum
should be connected across the relay coil. See Figure 5-21. Each opto output is programmed in the Output programming
block.
Figure 5-20 Digital Output Power Connections
Internally Supplied 24VDC Externally Supplied 24VDC

Sourcing Current Connections Sinking Current Connections Sourcing Current Connections Sinking Current Connections
J2
J2 Out1
17 Digital Output 1 +
J2 Digital Output 1 -
Out1 Out2 18
J2 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector) 19 Digital Output 2 +
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter) 17 Digital Output 1 + 20 Digital Output 2 -
Out2 Out1
19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector) 18 Digital Output 1 -
Out1 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter) 19 Digital Output 2 +
18 Digital Output 1 - Out2
20 Digital Output 2 - J3
Out2 J3 21 External User Return
20 Digital Output 2 -
J3 22 External User +24V
21 External User Return
J3 22 External User +24V 21 External User Return 23 Internal +24V
23 Internal +24V 22 External User +24V 24 Internal 24V Return
21 External User Return
22 24 Internal 24V Return 23 Internal +24V +
External User +24V
23 24 Internal 24V Return
Internal +24V User
24 Internal 24V Return 24VDC
+
User
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. 24VDC
Note: Digital Outputs are rated to 24VDC @ 60mA resistive (non-inductive).

5.7 Relay Outputs
Relay Outputs 1 and 2 provide N.O. and N.C. voltage free contacts. The internal relay function is shown in Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21 Relay Contacts
J3 If the load is a DC relay If the load is an AC

Control Board relay coil, install an RC
coil, install a flyback RC Snubber
Relay Out 1 N.C. 25 Load diode across the coil to + Snubber across the coil
Relay Out 1 COM 26 reduce noise to reduce noise
Relay Out 1 N.O. 27 Load transmission. transmission. 0.47 μf
RE RE
Relay Out 2 N.C. 28 Load 33 Ω
Relay Out 2 COM 29 -
Relay Out 2 N.O. 30 Load
Note: Relay Outputs are rated to 10-30VDC or 240VAC @ 5A resistive (non-inductive).
5.8 USB Port

The USB port shown in Figure 5-22 is a full 12Mbps USB 2.0 compliant port for serial communications. The connections are
described in Figure 5-22 and Table 5-13.
Figure 5-22 USB Receptacle Pin Identification
Host End (USB-A) 1 4
2 1
Peripheral End (USB-B)
3 4
Table 5-13 USB Port Connections

Pin Signal Name Description
1 Vbus USBus power from the host for monitoring
2 D- Data Return
3 D+ Data In
4 GND Power Supply Return

5.9 Communication Expansion Boards
The communication module slots are shown in Figure 5-23. All option boards are designed as plug-in modules.
Figure 5-23 Expansion Board Location
Keypad Regen
Connector Board
JP3 Connector
Ribbon Cable
RS485 Control
I/O Module Slot1 View From Rear (Opposite J1 Connector) Board
I/O Module
Slot2
J1 See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2.

J2
J3
5.9.1 RS485 Modbus

The serial communications port on the control board supports RS485 communications, Figure 5-23. The baud rate and node
addresses are selectable from the Keypad. Jumper JP3 (Figure 5-23) on the control board sets termination. As shown (pins 2
and 3 jumpered) no terminating resistor is used. Setting the jumper to pins 1 and 2 selects the 120 ohm terminating resistor
for the RS485 cable. The RS485 connections are described in Table 5-14. Refer to MN744 for connection and software
information. Note that the hardware specifications for this port follow the RS-485 standard.
Table 5-14 RS485 Multi-Drop Port Connections

Pin Signal Name Description
1 SCR Screen termination, connected to chassis on the control board
2 B Data Return
3 A Data In
S
B 4 GND Power Supply Return
A
G
S 5 SCR Screen termination, connected to chassis on the control board

5.10 Opto-Isolated Inputs
The equivalent circuit of the nine opto inputs is shown in Figure 5-24. The function of each input depends on the operating
mode selected and are described previously in this section. This Figure also shows the connections using the internal opto
input Supply.
Figure 5-24 Opto-Input Connections
J2
Enable
8
Digital Input 1
9
Digital Input 2
10
Digital Input 3
11
Digital Input 4
12
Digital Input 5
13
Digital Input 6
14
Digital Input 7
15
Digital Input 8
16
See Figure 5-4 for

connection information.
4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K 4.8K
Opto In Common
5.11 Opto-Isolated Outputs

The outputs are opto isolated and may be configured for sinking or sourcing. However, all must be configured the same. The
maximum voltage from opto output to common when active is 1.0 VDC (TTL compatible). The equivalent circuit for the opto
isolated outputs is shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Opto-Output Equivalent Circuit
J2
Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
17
18 Digital Output 1 (Emitter)

PC865 Digital Output 2 (Emitter)
50mA max 20
PC865
50mA max

5.12 Pre-Operation Checklist (Check of Electrical Items)
1. Verify AC line voltage at source matches control rating.
2. Inspect all power connections for accuracy, workmanship and tightness and compliance to codes.
3. Verify control and motor are grounded to each other and the control is connected to earth ground.
4. Check all signal wiring for accuracy.
5. Be certain all brake coils, contactors and relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an R-C filter for AC coils and
reverse polarity diodes for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not adequate.
5.13 Powerup Procedure

2. Verify that any enable inputs to J2-8 are open.
3. Disconnect the motor from the load (including coupling or inertia wheels).
4. Turn power on. Be sure there are no faults.
5. Set the Level 2 Output Limits block, “OPERATING ZONE” parameter as desired
(STD CONST TQ, STD VAR TQ, QUIET CONST TQ or QUIET VAR TQ).
6. If external dynamic brake hardware is used, set the Level 2 Brake Adjust block “Resistor Ohms” and “Resistor Watts”
parameters.
7. Enable the control (J2-8 connect to J3-24).
WARNING: The motor shaft will rotate during this procedure. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft movement
will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
8. Select basic parameters from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including “CALC MOTOR MODEL” (P2414).
9. Select “Advanced Prog”, Level 2 Blocks, Auto Tune, “One-Step Tuning” and run all tests.
11. Couple the motor to its load.
12. Verify freedom of motion of motor shaft.
13. Verify the motor coupling is tight without backlash.
14. Verify the holding brakes if any, are properly adjusted to fully release and set to the desired torque value.
15. Turn power on. Be sure no errors are displayed.
16. Execute “Speed Loop Tune” (Vector Mode Only).
17. Run the drive from the keypad using one of the following: the arrow keys for direct speed control, a keypad entered
speed or the JOG mode.
18. Select and program additional parameters to suit your application.
The control is now ready for use in the keypad mode. If a different operating mode is desired, refer to Chapter 5 Operating
Modes and Chapter 6 Programming and Operation.

5.14 Mint WorkBench
As an alternative to using the keypad for programming and setup, Baldor’s Mint WorkBench software version 5.5 or greater
can be used. When the software is installed and configured, the help topics provide information on how to use the software.
The following procedure will help you install and configure the software.
Before you can use Mint WorkBench software, it must be installed on your PC’s hard drive.
Be sure that the USB port of the control is connected to a USB port on your PC.
This must be connected to establish communication after the software is installed.
5.14.1 Install USB Driver
The control connects to a PC by using USB cable connection. This procedure installs the USB driver that is required by
Windows.
1. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com. Simply log into that web site and select
Products then select AC Controls then select VS1SP to locate the Software tools.
2. USB Device Driver
Figure 5-26 USB Driver

Select Control Type
Select Control Type

3. Click on USB Device Drive and select Open to view the uncompressed files.
4. Be sure the control is powered up.

5. Connect the USB cable to the control.
6. Install the USB drivers.
a. Choose “install from a list or specific location” and click Next.
b. Choose “Don’t search I will choose the driver to install”.
c. Click “Have Disk”. Then enter the location that you stored the inf and sys file (in step 3) and click Next to install the
driver files.
7. Proceed to the Mint WorkBench installation procedure.

5.14.2 Install Mint WorkBench
1. Use the Add/Remove Software feature of the Windows control panel and remove previous versions of Mint WorkBench
software.
2. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com
Simply log into that web site, Figure 5-26, and locate
1. Mint WorkBench v X.x
3. Click on Download the software, and run the installation program.
4. When installation is complete, the Mint WorkBench program will start, see Figure 5-27.
a. Click “Start New Project”.
b. Click “Scan”.
c. Select “H2” platform from the list.
d. Click Select and the Mint WorkBench main menu is displayed, see Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-27 Mint WorkBench Software Set-up
a
c
Figure 5-28 Communication Established
IHH-1.22 IHH-1.22
Software version is Inverter (IHH) version 1 release 22.

5. Parameter values can be modified as desired.
Figure 5-29 Mint WorkBench Main Menu

Change a Parameter Value Example:
Change Preset Speed 1 to 48 RPM.
Click on Preset Speeds Block.
Click in the Value Column for Preset Speed 1.
Type in the new value “48” press enter.
Note that the keypad will instantly display the
new value.
If the parameter value is a selection, a list will

appear for you to make the selection.
6. When all parameter values are as desired, they can be saved to a file. Click File, see Figure 5-30. The PTX file is saved in
My Documents\My Mint directory.
7. When complete, the entire project can be saved to your PCs hard disk for future use. Click File, Save File, see Figure
5-30. The WBX file is saved in C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\Firmware\ you can choose the directory.
Figure 5-30 Save Parameters & Project
Note: For Parameter Tables, a .ptx extension is Note: For Mint WorkBench Projects, a .wbx extension is
automatically added when you enter a file name. automatically added when you enter a file name.
The help menus provided with the software can be used to explore other features and descriptions of menu choices.
As previously stated, either the Mint WorkBench program or the Keypad can be used to adjust parameter values for the
application.

5.14.3 Update Firmware
Installing chx Files
(If you are installing msx files skip this procedure and go to “Installing msx Files”).
This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost. After the firmware download, all user
data values must be reprogrammed.
1. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com
Simply log into that web site, Figure 5-26. Locate and click on Drive Firmware.
2. Save the firmware file to a location on your hard disk.
(for example: C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\Firmware\VS1 Vector\IHH_1_22.chx).
3. Start the Workbench program as before, see Figure 5-31.
a. Select “Download Firmware” from the Tools menu.
b. Select “Advanced” then “Download Firmware File”, click “Yes” at the warning to download.
c. Select the firmware file to download (for example: IHH_1_22chx).
d. When complete, the new firmware version is displayed and the control is ready for use.
Note: All user settings and motor parameter values have been over written by factory settings.
Figure 5-31 Mint WorkBench Firmware Update
a
c
IHH-1.22 d

Software version is Inverter (IHH) version 1 release 22.
Installing A Mint System (.msx) file

(If you are installing chx files skip this procedure and go to “Installing chx Files”).
1. The msx file must be saved to a location on your hard disk (for example: C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\
Firmware\VS1 Inverter\VS1 Inverter Build 122msx). This procedure installs the msx file contents within the same directory
(chx, ini and txt files are extracted).
2. Start the WorkBench program as before, see Figure 5-27.
a. Select “Install System File Firmware” from the Tools menu, Figure 5-32.
b. Select the firmware file to download (for example: VS1 Inverter Build 122.msx)
c. Select OPEN.
d. When complete, the install successful message is displayed, click OK.
b 122.chx
122.ini
122.msx
122.txt
a
c VS1 Vector
Original msx file

VS1 122.msx

3. This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost.
After the firmware download, all user data values must be reprogrammed.
a. Select “Download Firmware” from the Tools menu, Figure 5-33.
b. Select control type and version to download.
c. Select Download to control to download the firmware.
d. When complete, the new firmware version is displayed and the control is ready for use.
Note: All user settings and motor parameter values have been over written by factory settings.
b
a b d

Chapter 6
Using the Keypad
6.1 Keypad Components
The keypad is used to program the control parameters, to operate the motor and to monitor the status and outputs of the
control by accessing the display options, the diagnostic menus and the fault log. Additionally drive parameters can be
stored in the keypad for future retrieval.
6.1.1 Display Description
Keypad Display – Displays status Display Diagnostics –

Information during Local or Remote I/O Status
operation. It also displays information I/O Function configuration
during parameter setup and fault or STATUS FWD LOCAL
Modified Parameters
Diagnostic information. Control Operation Data
Custom Units
159.5 V 600 RPM Fault Display – 10 Faults with Time
6.2 A 20.0 HZ Stamp
DIAG 600r MAIN

F1 – Alternates or “toggles” between F2 – Clears faults or undo parameter
The last two menu choices or function edit changes or function indicated by
Indicated by text displayed directly text displayed directly above key.
Above key. Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Moves cursor to select menu choices.
ENTER – Press ENTER to save LOCAL/REMOTE – Switches between

parameter value changes. In the local and remote modes.
display mode the ENTER key is used to
directly set the local speed reference. It
is also used to select other operations
when prompted by the keypad display.
MENU/ESC – Selects the menu HELP – Provides help at each display

display when viewing status. The screen, setup parameter and fault.
following menu items are shown: Press to view/close help information.
Status, Basic Params, Advanced Prog,
Event Log, Diagnostics and Display
Options. Backs up one level for other
screens.
REV – When pressed, initiates a JOG – Initiates Jog mode. Press FWD
reverse direction run command. or REV for motion. Only active in local
mode.
STOP – Initiates a stop command. FWD – When pressed, initiates a

Note: Pressing the stop key twice in forward direction run command.
succession will immediately disable the
drive placing the motor in a coast stop
condition. Indicator Lights – (on indicated key)
STOP key with red light indicator.
FWD key with green light indicator.
REV key with green light indicator.
JOG key with green light indicator.

MN764 Using the Keypad 6-1

6.1.2 Display Features
STOP=Stop; FWD=Forward; REV=Reverse

Present Menu Selection STATUS FWD LOCAL Local / Remote Mode
159.5V 600RPM
6.2A 20.0HZ
Previous Menu Selection DIAG 600r MAIN Press F2 to go back one menu level
(Press F1 to return to previous menu)
Speed Reference
Prog Mode Display Features:
The first character of the parameter number PROG PRESET SPEEDS

has the following meaning:
PRESET SPEED 1
F = Factory Setting (parameter value has not been changed) 30RPM
C = Custom value set by user (not factory value) STATUS F1001T1 BACK
V = Parameter value may be Viewed but not changed Parameter Table used:
T1, T2, T3, T4.
L = Parameter value is locked, security code required
6-2 Using the Keypad MN764

6.2 Status Mode
When AC power is applied to the control, the keypad will display the status.
Action Description Display Comments
Apply Power Logo is displayed for a short time.
The Status screen is then
displayed.
Normal status screen at start up. STATUS STOP LOCAL The display can be changed to
Displays Motor Voltage, Motor several formats by pressing the
Amps, Motor Speed RPM and or keys.
Motor Frequency Hz. 0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
Press key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL
0RPM
STOP
0.0A
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
0RPM
STOP
0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
0.0A
STOP
0.0V
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
0RPM
STOP 0.0V
0.0A
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
0.0NM
STOP 0.0A
0RPM
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
Press key The first screen format is STATUS STOP LOCAL

displayed.
0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0r MAIN
Press FWD key Motor begins to rotate in the STATUS FWD LOCAL
forward direction at the preset
speed.
159.5V 600RPM
0.2A 20.0HZ
DIAG 600r MAIN

6.3 Menu Display
After power-up the display shows the Status screen. Press the Menu key to display menu options.
Status Display STATUS STOP LOCAL
0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
Press Menu/Esc Displays top level menu options. Press or to move cursor over
STATUS
the desired selection the press
BASIC PARAMS
“Enter” to select and display the
ADVANCED PROG
selection.
EVENT LOG
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAG BACK
6.4 Basic Params

From the Menu display screen, select Basic Params and press Enter.
Parameter Status
All programmable parameters are displayed with an “F” at the bottom center of the display. “F” means it is the factory
setting value. “C” means it is a custom value set by the user. “V” means the parameter value may be viewed but not
changed while the motor is operating. If the parameter is displayed with an “L”, the value is locked and may not be changed
until the security code is entered.
Basic Params Display Control type display. The BASIC MOTOR CONTROL Press Enter to select the
parameter number “1601” is given parameter and press the or
at the bottom center of the keys to change the preset value
CONTROL TYPE
display. “F”1601 indicates it is at to a different control type.
V/F Control
the factory setting and has not Press enter when finished to exit
been changed. and save the new value or F2 to
STATUS F1601T1 BACK exit without saving.
Press to go to the BASIC MOTOR DATA

next Basic Params
screen. MOTOR RATED HP
10.0 HP
STATUS F2416T1 BACK
Press to go to the BASIC MOTOR DATA T1 indicates the Table Number or

next Basic Params the parameter list in use. Four
screen. MOTOR RATED VOLT parameter tables are available,
240.0 V T1, T2, T3 or T4
(See Level 2, Drive Config, Active
Param Table parameter P0052.)
STATUS F2401T1 BACK

next Basic Params
screen. MOTOR RATED AMPS
9.6 A
STATUS F2402T1 BACK

next Basic Params
screen. MOTOR MAG AMPS
3.1 A
STATUS F2405T1 BACK

next Basic Params
screen. MOTOR RATED SPD
1754 RPM
STATUS F2403T1 BACK

Basic Params Continued
next Basic Params
screen. MOTOR RATED FREQ
60.00 HZ
STATUS F2404T1 BACK

next Basic Params
screen.
CALC MOTOR MODEL
No
STATUS F2414 BACK
Press to go to the
BASIC INPUT SETUP
next Basic Params
screen.
OPERATING MODE
Keypad
STATUS F1401T1 BACK
Press to go to the
BASIC RAMP RATES
next Basic Params
screen. ACCEL TIME 1
3.0 SEC
STATUS F1101T1 BACK
Press to go to the
BASIC RAMP RATES
next Basic Params
screen. DECEL TIME 1
3.0 SEC
STATUS F1104T1 BACK
Press to go to the
BASIC DRIVE LIMITS
next Basic Params
screen. MIN OUTPUT SPEED
0.00 Hz
STATUS F2002T1 BACK
Press to go to the DRIVE LIMITS

next Basic Params BASIC
screen.
MAX OUTPUT SPEED
60.00 Hz
STATUS F2003T1 BACK
Press to go to the BASIC

next Basic Params
screen. END OF
BASIC PARAMS
STATUS BACK

How to Change a Value
These are the BASIC screens. To change a value, simply display the desired parameter and press Enter and change the
value. For example:
Press to go to the 1601 indicates the parameter BASIC MOTOR CONTROL
next Basic Params number and F indicates it is the
screen. factory value. CONTROL TYPE
V/F Control
STATUS F1601T1 BACK
Press Enter to choose EDIT MOTOR CONTROL Press “F2” to exit EDIT mode
parameter value and without saving changes.
edit. CONTROL TYPE
V/F Control
END F1601T1 BACK
Press the or keys EDIT MOTOR CONTROL

to change parameter
value. CONTROL TYPE
Open Vector
END F1601T1 BACK
Press Enter to save the BASIC MOTOR CONTROL

parameter value and
exit. CONTROL TYPE
Open Vector
STATUS C1601T1 BACK
When editing a parameter value, the function of the “F1” key (previous parameter block) shown in the lower left of the
display changes to one of the following to help select the parameter value: TOP Press “F1” to display and select the first
value in the list of parameter values.
When the first parameter value is displayed, press Enter or scroll to select a different value. END Press “F1” to display and
select the last value in the list of parameter values.
When the last parameter value is displayed, press Enter or scroll to select a different value. DEF Press “F1” to display and
select the Factory Setting value.
PREV Press “F1” to display and select previous value.
MIN Press “F1” to display and select minimum parameter value.
MAX Press “F1” to display and select maximum parameter value.
Note: When END is displayed, Pressing “F1” will display the last value in the list but then TOP or DEF is displayed.
The “F1” key allows you to quickly move through large lists of parameter choices. The value is not selected until
you press “Enter”.

6.5 Save Parameter Values
The keypad keys and display work with the memory of the control. When a parameter value is displayed, the displayed value
is the value stored in control memory. The changes are written to non-volatile memory and are stored even when power is
removed. Normal control operation can resume when power is restored.
Keypad memory is only used to backup the four parameter tables stored in control memory. This means that after the
parameters are configured for the application and the control operation is as desired, a copy of the parameters can be
saved to keypad memory as a backup copy. This backup copy can be restored at any time. This is useful to restore program
operation after a firmware update or to make several controls operate the same. It prevents having to make the changes to
each control individually.

Press Menu Go to the Advanced Prog PRESET SPEEDS Press “Enter” to select.
Level 1 Keypad Setup block. RAMP RATES
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP
STATUS BACK
Press Enter to edit Scroll to PARAMS TO KEYPAD PROG KEYPAD SETUP

Press “Enter” to change
Keypad Setup parameter value.
parameters. PARAMS TO KEYPAD
No Note that T1 is missing from the
parameter number. It is not part
of the stored parameter table
STATUS F1310 BACK values T1, T2, T3 and T4.
Press Enter to edit EDIT KEYPAD SETUP

Press to change value to YES.
parameter.
PARAMS TO KEYPAD
Yes
STATUS F1310 BACK
Press Enter to load the PROG KEYPAD SETUP

Press “F2” to return to Keypad
parameter table values Setup menu.
from control memory to PARAMS TO KEYPAD
keypad memory. No
STATUS F1310 BACK
A copy of all four parameter tables have now been saved to non-volatile keypad memory.

6.6 Restore Parameter Values
The keypad keys and display work with the memory of the control. When a parameter value is displayed, the displayed value
is the value stored in control memory. The changes are written to non-volatile memory and are stored even when power is
removed. Normal control operation can resume when power is restored.
Keypad memory is only used to backup the four parameter tables stored in control memory. This means that after the
parameters are configured for the application and the control operation is as desired, a copy of the parameters can be
saved to keypad memory as a backup copy. This backup copy can be restored at any time. This is useful to restore program
operation after a firmware update or to make several controls operate the same. It prevents having to make the changes to
each control individually.

Press Menu Go to the Advanced Prog PRESET SPEEDS Press “Enter” to select.
Level 1 Keypad Setup block. RAMP RATES
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP
Press Enter to edit Scroll to DOWNLOAD SELECT PROG KEYPAD SETUP

ALL = Download all parameters.
Keypad Setup and change as desired. Motor = Download only motor
parameters. DOWNLOAD SELECT parameters.
ALL Other = All parameters other than
motor parameters.
STATUS F1311T1 BACK
Scroll to KEYPAD TO PARAMS PROG KEYPAD SETUP

Press “Enter” to change
parameter value.
KEYPAD TO PARAMS
No
STATUS F1312 BACK
Press Enter to edit EDIT KEYPAD SETUP

Press to change value to YES.
parameter.
KEYPAD TO PARAMS
Yes
STATUS F1312 BACK
Press Enter to load the PROG KEYPAD SETUP

Press “F2” to return to Keypad
parameter table values Setup menu.
from keypad memory to KEYPAD TO PARAMS
control memory. No
STATUS F1312 BACK
A copy of all four parameter tables have now been restored to non-volatile memory control.

6.7 Advanced Prog
At the Menu display screen, select ADVANCED PROG and press Enter. This menu provides access to all drive parameters
which are organized in blocks that are grouped into one of 3 levels. Examples of tasks accomplished via this menu are:
1. Adjustment of motor data not available in the basic parameters menu.
2. Auto Tune the motor.
3. Customize the drive parameters to your application.
Parameter Status
All programmable parameters are displayed with its parameter number shown at the bottom center of the display. “F” means
it is the factory setting value. “C” means it is a custom value set by the user. “V” means the parameter value may be viewed
but not changed while the motor is operating. If the parameter is displayed with an “L”, the value is locked and may not be
changed until the security code is entered.

Advanced Prog Display Top Level Advanced Prog menu. Press enter to program level 1
LEVEL 1 BLOCKS block parameters. or
LEVEL 2 BLOCKS Press to view Level 2 blocks.
LEVEL 3 BLOCKS Press to view Level 3 blocks.
MODIFIED PARAMS Press to view list of parameters
LINEAR LIST that have been changed from their
STATUS BACK factory settings or to view a list of
parameters organized by number.
Press Enter to edit Top of Level 1 Advanced Prog PRESET SPEEDS Press to scroll to next level 1
Level 1 parameters. Block 1 menu. RAMP RATES block .
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP
STATUS BACK
Press Enter to select Preset speed 1 value display. PROG PRESET SPEEDS Press to go to next Preset
Preset Speeds. Speed parameter.
PRESET SPEED 1
1.00 Hz
STATUS F1001T1 BACK

Press Enter to edit Press or to increase or EDIT PRESET SPEEDS Press or to move cursor.
Preset Speed 1. decrease the value highlighted by
the cursor . PRESET SPEED 1 Press “F1” to select the maximum
allowable speed.
001.00 Hz
MAX F1001T1 RESET
Press to increase the value. EDIT PRESET SPEEDS

Press F2 to exit editing the value
without saving or press Enter to
PRESET SPEED 1 exit and save the new value.
002.00 Hz
MAX F1001T1 RESET
Press Enter to save the PROG Press F2 to return to previous

PRESET SPEEDS
new value and stop screen.
editing. PRESET SPEED 1
2.00 Hz Press F1 to go to Status screen.
STATUS C1001T1 BACK
Parameter values in other Level 1, 2 and 3 blocks can be selected and edited in the same way.

6.7.1 Modified Parameters
Allows viewing of all parameters that have been changed from factory set values.

Advanced Prog Display Top Level Advanced Prog menu. Press to scroll to Modified Params.
LEVEL 1 BLOCKS Press enter to view list of
LEVEL 2 BLOCKS parameters that have been
LEVEL 3 BLOCKS changed from their factory
MODIFIED PARAMS settings.
LINEAR LIST
Press Enter to select View parameter values that have PROG Press to go to next modified
PRESET SPEEDS
Modified Parameters. been changed from factory parameter.
settings by user selection, PRESET SPEED 1 Press F2 to return to Advanced
autotune, etc. 2.00 Hz Prog menu.
STATUS C1001T1 BACK
PROG Press to go to next modified

INPUT SETUP
parameter.
OPERATING MODE Press F2 to return to Advanced
PLC Prog menu.
STATUS C1401T1 BACK
6.7.2 Linear List

Advanced Prog Display Top Level Advanced Prog menu. Press to scroll to Linear List.
LEVEL 1 BLOCKS Press enter to view list of
LEVEL 2 BLOCKS parameters beginning with 1001.
LEVEL 3 BLOCKS
MODIFIED PARAMS
LINEAR LIST
Press Enter to select The number and name of each Press or keys to scroll to
sequential view of parameter is displayed in listing C1001 PRESET SPEED 1 through the parameter list.
parameters by format. F1002 PRESET SPEED 2
Press or keys to jump to
parameter number F1003 PRESET SPEED 3 next page.
The first character of the parameter F1004 PRESET SPEED 4
“Linear List”. number has the following meaning: Press F2 to return to previous
F1005 PRESET SPEED 5
F = Factory Setting menu.
PNUM BACK
C = Custom value set by user
V = Parameter value may be Viewed
but not changed.
L = Parameter value is locked, security
code required.

Change a parameter value within the linear list as follows:

Press Enter to select The number and name of each Press or keys to scroll to
the parameter value to parameter is displayed in listing C1001 PRESET SPEED 1 through the parameter list.
be viewed or modified. format. F1002 PRESET SPEED 2
Press or keys to jump to
F1003 PRESET SPEED 3 next page.
F1005 PRESET SPEED 5 Press F2 to return to previous
menu.
PNUM BACK
Press Enter to change The parameter value can be PROG Press Enter then use cursor keys
PRESET SPEEDS
the parameter value. changed as previously described to position cursor and increase or
in Advanced Programming. PRESET SPEED 1 decrease each character under
2.00 Hz the cursor as desired.
Press F2 to return to previous
menu.
STATUS C1001T1 BACK
Jump to display a different range of parameters as follows:

Press F1 key (PNUM) The parameter number is Press F1 key (PNUM) to highlight
to highlight Parameter highlighted. C1001 PRESET SPEED 1 Parameter Number.
Number. F1002 PRESET SPEED 2 Press or keys to scroll.
F1003 PRESET SPEED 3 Press F2 (BACK) to return to
F1004 PRESET SPEED 4 previous menu.
PNUM BACK
Press Enter key to edit The parameter number is Use cursor keys to position cursor
the highlight Parameter highlighted. C2001 PRESET SPEED 1 and increase or decrease each
Number. F1002 PRESET SPEED 2 character under the cursor as
F1003 PRESET SPEED 3 desired. Press Enter when
F1004 PRESET SPEED 4 finished.
F1005 PRESET SPEED 5 Press F2 to return to previous
PNUM BACK menu.
The newly selected parameter Press or keys to scroll to
number range is displayed. F2001 OPERATING ZONE through the parameter list.
These values may be viewed and F2002 MIN OUTPUT SPEED Press or keys to jump to
changed or jump to a different F2003 MAX OUTPUT SPEED next page. Press F2 (BACK) to
parameter range may be F2004 PWM FREQUENCY return to previous menu.
performed. F2006 PEAK CURR LEVEL
PNUM BACK

6.8 Event Log
From the Menu display screen, select Event Log and press enter. Trace is used to display control conditions present at the
time the fault occurred. A separate trace log is recorded for each event.

Event Log Display Displays error name, EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press or to view next entry.
Entry # and time the
error occurred. Press F2 to view Trace log.
LOW INITIAL BUS
LOW INITIAL BUS 0 4-Jul-06 09:35:00 Press F1 to return to Status
0 Date Time Menu.
STATUS TRACE Note: Trace is described in

Entry # DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
0-9 Chapter 9 of this manual.
Input states, Output states, various voltage and current values etc. can be viewed to help understand the cause of the fault
condition. See Chapter 9 of this manual for more information.
6.9 Diagnostics
From the Menu display screen, select Diagnostics and press enter. These are read only values with the exception of the real
time clock settings.
See Chapter 9 for a more detailed description.

Press Menu Displays top level menu options. Press or to move cursor over
STATUS the “DIAGNOSTICS” selection.
BASIC PARAMS
ADVANCED PROG
EVENT LOG Press Enter to view diagnostic
DIAGNOSTICS information.
STATUS BACK
Press to display next Displays active operating mode DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. settings.
OPERATING MODE
Keypad
Speed
V/F Control
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Bit display of digital inputs, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. outputs and the voltage present at previous Diagnostic screen.
the internal 24V supply terminals. DIGITAL I/O
Note: Example display shows that INPUTS 100000000 Press F2 to return to previous
the drive enable terminal OUTPUTS 0001 menu.
(J2-8) is on and that USER 24V 24.9V
Relay Out 2 is on. EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or

group. previous Diagnostic screen.
PROC CONTROL PID Press F2 to return to previous
Output Frequency, % Feedforward 0.00HZ 0.0FF menu.
% Setpoint, % Feedback 0.0SP 0.0FB Note: This screen does not appear
unless P#1401 is set to Process Control.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Displays software version, hp, STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
group. volts and Amp/Volt ratings. previous Diagnostic screen.
IHH-1.22
RATED HP 3HP Press F2 to return to previous
RATED VOLTS 240.0V menu.
RATED A/V 4.0A/V
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Displays software version, drive STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
group. rated and peak current ratings. IHH-1.22 previous Diagnostic screen.
RATED CURRE 9.6A Press F2 to return to previous

RATED PK CU 16.8A menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Diagnostics Continued

Press to display next STOP LOCAL
Press or to go to the next or
DIAG previous Diagnostic screen.
group. Displays:
POWER BASE VERSION
Power Base ID number ID 0x000A2003 Press F2 to return to previous
EE Firmware version EE VER 0x00000001 menu.
FPGA firmware version FPGA VER 0x00000A02 0x=Hexadecimal
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN 0b=Binary
Press to display next Displays energy cost (based on DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. parameter # 2305 value). previous Diagnostic screen.
REAL TIME CLOCK
Jan 1, 2009
22:07:35 Press F2 to return to previous
menu.
RUN TIMER 474.1HR
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Displays energy cost (based on STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
group. parameter # 2305 value). previous Diagnostic screen.
ENERGY
EST POWER 0.00KW Press F2 to return to previous
EST ENERGY 0.0KWH menu.
EST COST 0.0$
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN Press F1 to go to Status screen.
Press to display next Diagnostic Analog Input values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG INPUTS
ANA IN1 1.3v Press F2 to return to previous
ANA IN2 0.0v menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Diagnostic Analog Output values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. display . previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANA OUT1 0.0V Press F2 to return to previous
ANA OUT2 0.0V menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Diagnostic installed Option Card Press or to go to the next or
DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. identification display. previous Diagnostic screen.
OPTION BOARDS
OPTION 1 ETHERNET Press F2 to return to previous
OPTION 2 NONE menu.
FEEDBACK NONE
Press to display next Displays keypad software version. DIAG STOP LOCAL
group.
KEYPAD VERSION
KEYPAD SOF 1.1X
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Displays Composite Reference DIAG STOP LOCAL

group. values. COMPOSITE REF
COMPONENT A 0.00%
COMPONENT B 0.00%
REFERENCE 0.00%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm
Press to display next LOCAL Press or to go to the next or

DIAG STOP
DRIVE
DC Bus Voltage BUS VOLTAGE 333.9V Press F2 to return to previous
Drive Heatsink Temperature DRIVE TEMP 26.1C menu.
% Drive Overload (remaining) DRIVE O/L L 100.0%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

MOTOR
Motor Voltage MOTOR VOLTAGE 333.9V Press F2 to return to previous
Motor Current MOTOR CURR 4.8A menu.
% Motor Overload (remaining) MOTOR O/L L 100.0%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

6.10 Display Options
KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change
PROG
parameter value.
KEYPAD CONTRAST Press or to display next
50% screen.
Press “F2” to return to previous

DIAG F1313T1 BACK menu.
KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change

PROG
parameter value.
BACKLIGHT Press or to display next
On screen.
Press “F2” to return to previous

DIAG F1314T1 BACK menu.

6.11 Operating the Control from the Keypad
To activate the LOCAL Mode, first press the “STOP” key (if enabled).
Note: Pressing the keypad STOP key (if enabled) will automatically issue a motor stop command and change to LOCAL
mode. Selection of LOCAL Mode overrides any remote or serial control inputs except the External Trip input, Local
Enable Input or STOP input.
The control can operate the motor from the keypad in two ways.
1. JOG Command.
2. Speed adjustment with Keypad entered values and/or Keypad Up/Down arrow keys.
Note: If the level 1, input block operating mode parameter is set to Keypad, then no other means of operation is permitted
other than from the keypad.
6.11.1 Accessing the Keypad JOG Command

Status Display STOP LOCAL
STATUS
0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN
Press JOG key The JOG LED will light indicating FWD LOCAL To change Jog Speed, Edit
STATUS
Next, press and hold the JOG mode is active. Holding Level 1 parameter 1201 (Jog
the FWD or REV key the FWD or REV key starts JOG Speed).
26.8V 210RPM
operation. 1.3A 7.0HZ
Releasing FWD or REV key will Press STOP key twice to
terminate motor rotation. terminate JOG mode.
DIAG 7.00r MAIN
6.11.2 Speed Adjustment using Local Speed Reference

At the Status Display, LOCAL REFs
EDIT
press ENTER key to
access Local Speed
LOC SPEED REF
Reference.
000.00 Hz
MAX F0201 RESET
Press or to move cursor.

EDIT LOCAL REFs
Press or to increase or
decrease value at cursor.
LOC SPEED REF
Press ENTER when finished and
000.00 Hz
save the new value.
DIAG F0201 BACK
Press or to move cursor.

EDIT LOCAL REFs
Press or to increase or
decrease value at cursor.
LOC SPEED REF
Press ENTER when finished and
020.00 Hz
save the new value.
DIAG C0201 BACK
Press FWD or REV key. The control will turn the motor FWD LOCAL Press STOP key to terminate
STATUS
shaft at the local speed ref speed. local speed mode.
76.7V 600RPM
1.3A 20.0Hz Press or to increase or
decrease motor speed during
rotation.
DIAG 20.00r BACK

Chapter 7
Parameter Descriptions
7.1 Level 1 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 1 Blocks)
Table 7-1 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions
Parameter (Number)
Block Title Parameter Name and Description
Selection (Value)
PRESET Preset Speed 1 (1001) Preset Value: 1
SPEEDS Preset Speed 2 (1002) Preset Value: 2
Preset Speed 3 (1003) Preset Value: 3
Range: 0 - Max Speed Hz
Allows selection of 15 predefined motor operating speeds. Each speed may
be selected using external switches connected to terminals at J2. For motor
operation, a motor direction command must be given along with a preset
speed command.
RAMP Accel Time 1 (1101) Preset Value: 3.0
RATES Accel Time 2 (1107) Preset Value: 3.0
Range: 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds
Accel time is the number of seconds required for the motor to increase at a
linear rate from 0 to “Max Output Speed” parameter (P2003) in the Level 2
Output Limits block.
Decel Time 1 (1104) Preset Value: 3.0
Decel Time 2 (1110) Preset Value: 3.0
Decel time is the number of seconds required for the motor to decrease at
a linear rate from the speed specified in the “Max Output Speed” parameter
(P2003) to 0.
Start S-Acc 1 (1102) Preset Value: 0.0
Start S-Acc 2 (1108) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Start S-Curve Acceleration as a percentage of accel time (% 1 and 2).
End S-Acc 1 (1103) Preset Value: 0.0
End S-Acc 2 (1109) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
End S-Curve Acceleration as a percentage of accel time (% 1 and 2).
Start S-Dec 1 (1105) Preset Value: 0.0
Start S-Dec 2 (1111) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Start S-Curve Deceleration as a percentage of decel time (% 1 and 2).
End S-Dec 1 (1106) Preset Value: 0.0
End S-Dec 2 (1112) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
End S-Curve Deceleration as a percentage of decel time (% 1 and 2).
MN764 Parameter Descriptions 7-1

Table 7-1 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions Continued
Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
RAMP PL Dec Time (1113) Preset Value: 1.0
RATES Range: 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds
(Continued)
Time to stop the motor from maximum drive speed during a power loss.
% Maximum Speed Commanded Speed
100
Speed Curve
80 (Accel)
Speed Curve
60 (Decel)
Accel Rate 40
20
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 Seconds
-20
-40
Start End Start End Decel Rate
S-Accel 1 S-Accel 1 S-Decel 1 S-Decel 1
Accel Time Decel Time
JOG Jog Speed (1201) Preset Value: 7

SETTINGS Range: 0 - MAX Speed Hz
Jog Speed is the programmed speed used during jog. Jog can be initiated
from the keypad or terminal strip. At the Keypad, press the JOG key then
press and hold the direction (FWD or REV). For Standard Run 3Wire mode,
close the JOG input (J2-12) at the terminal strip then close and maintain the
direction input (J2-9 or J2-10). Process Control mode operation is different. If
the terminal strip Process Control Enable input (J2-13) is closed, pressing the
Keypad JOG key (or closing J2-14) will cause the drive to move in the direction
of the error (without pressing FWD or REV).
Jog Accel Time (1202) Preset Value: 10.0
The accel rate or time to reach max Speed.
Time to reach Jog Speed=(Jog Speed/Max Speed) x (Jog Accel Time).
Jog Start S-Acc (1203) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Start S-Curve Acceleration as a percentage of jog accel time.
Jog End S-Acc (1204 ) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
End S-Curve Acceleration as a percentage of jog accel time.
Jog Decel Time (1205) Preset Value: 10.0
The decel rate or time to decel from max Speed.
Time to reach zero speed=(Jog Speed/Max Speed) x (Jog Decel Time).
Jog Start S-Dec (1206) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Start S-Curve Deceleration as a percentage of jog decel time.
Jog End S-Dec (1207) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
End S-Curve Deceleration as a percentage of jog decel time.
Jog Forward (1209) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Mode Disabled.
On (1) Enables Jog in the drive forward direction at Jog speed for keypad mode.
Jog Reverse (1210) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Mode Disabled.
On (1) Enables Jog in the drive reverse direction at Jog speed for keypad mode.
7-2 Parameter Descriptions MN764

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
KEYPAD Stop Key (1301) Preset Value: 1
SETUP Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Keypad STOP key is not active.
Allows keypad STOP key to initiate motor stop during remote or serial
operation. If active, pressing STOP selects Local mode and initiates the stop
On (1)
command. Note: Pressing STOP key twice in rapid succession will immediately
terminate PWM to motor and disable the drive.
Stop Mode (1302) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Regen (0) The voltage and frequency to the motor is reduced at a rate set by Decel Time.
Coast (1) Motor is turned off and allowed to coast to a stop.
Selects if the Stop command causes the motor to COAST to a stop or REGEN
to a stop.
Run Forward (1303) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Disables FWD key in Local mode.
On (1) Makes the keypad FWD key active in Local mode.
Run Reverse (1304) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Disables REV key in Local mode.
On (1) Makes the keypad REV key active in Local mode.
Switch on Fly (1305) Preset Value: 0
(LOCAL/REMOTE KEY) Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Disables Switch on Fly.
On (1) Allows switching between Local and Remote while Control is on.
Local Hot Start (1306) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Disables the Stop input at J2-11 in the keypad operating mode.
On (1) Enables the Stop input at J2-11 in the keypad operating mode.
Speed Increment (1307) Preset Value: 1
Range: 1 to 1800 RPM or 0.01 to 60 Hz
Sets the increment of speed change for each key press.
(1-3600 RPM or 0-60 Hz)
Init Local Speed (1308) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 2
Zero Speed (0) Initializes local speed to 0 RPM on Power Up.
Last Speed (1) Initializes local speed to last speed on Power Up.
Set Speed (2) Initializes local speed to “Set Speed” (P1309) on Power Up.
Set Speed (1309) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - MAX Speed
At power up, initializes the local speed to this preset value if “Init Local Speed”
= Set Speed.
Params to Keypad (1310) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) No action.
Transfers the parameter settings stored in the control memory (flash) to keypad
On (1) memory.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
KEYPAD Download Select (1311) Preset Value: 0
SETUP Range: 0 - 2
(Continued)
All (0) All parameters.
Motor (1) Motor parameters only.
Other (2) All parameters except Motor parameters.
Selects parameters to download (All, Motor or Other) with “Keypad to Params”
(P1312). See Appendix B for notation of which parameters are motor related.
Keypad to Params (1312) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No action.
Transfers the parameter settings stored in keypad memory to the control
Yes (1)
memory (flash).
Keypad Contrast (1313) Preset Value: 50
Range: 0 - 100%
Sets LCD contrast: 0=dimmest, 100=brightest.
Backlight (1314) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Sets the Keypad Display backlight OFF.
On (1) Sets the Keypad Display backlight ON.
LOC TORQUE MODE (1315) Preset Value: 0
Open Vector Only. Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Disables local torque mode.
On (1) Enables local torque mode operation.
LOC TORQUE REF (1316) Preset Value: 0.00
Open Vector Only. Range: -100 to 100%
Local torque mode reference value.
INPUT Operating Mode (1401) Preset Value: 0
SETUP Range: 0 - 16
Keypad (0) Drive operates from keypad only.
Drive operates from digital inputs and command source. Preset Speed 1 may
Standard Run 2Wire (1)
also be selected.
Drive operates from digital inputs and command source. Preset Speed 1 may
Standard Run 3Wire (2)
also be selected.
Operation in 15 Preset Speeds 2 Wire Mode is controlled by digital inputs at
15 Preset Speeds (3)
J2. Speeds set in parameters P1001 to P1015.
Fan & Pump 2Wire (4) Operation in Fan & Pump 2 Wire controlled by digital inputs at J2.
Fan & Pump 3Wire (5) Operation in Fan & Pump 3 Wire controlled by digital inputs at J2.
The Process Control provides an auxiliary closed loop general purpose PID set
Process Control (6)
point control.
3Spd Ana 2Wire (7) Provides 2 Wire control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds.
3Spd Ana 3Wire (8) Provides 3 Wire control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds.
Electronic Potentiometer provides digital inputs for Speed Increase and Speed
E-Pot 2Wire (9) Decrease. Also provides 2 digital inputs for selection of E-Pot or "Command
Source" (1402), Preset Speed 1, and Preset Speed 2.
Electronic Potentiometer provides digital inputs for Speed Increase and Speed
E-Pot 3Wire (10) Decrease. Also provides a digital input for selection of E-Pot or “Command
Source” (1402).
Network (11) Provides Bipolar speed or torque control.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
INPUT Operating Mode (1401)
SETUP (Continued)
(Continued)
Provides a seven segment speed profile for cyclic operation or test cycle. See
Profile Run (12)
Level 3, Profile Run Block.
Provides bipolar speed or torque control. Torque control only available in
Bipolar (14)
vector mode.
Provides electronic gearing of two or more controls from upstream reference.
Pulse Follower (15)
(Requires Expansion Board EXBHH007).
PLC (16) Provides for control from custom designed internal logic.
External connections to the control are made at the control terminal strip
(wiring diagrams are shown in Chapter 5 “Operating Modes”).
Command Source (1402) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 10
None (0) Command Source is not used.
Analog In1 (1) Connect a 10Kohm pot at J1 or connect a 0-10VDC signal to J1-2 and J1-1.
Connect a 0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA source to J1-4 and
Analog In2 (2) 5. 4-20mA should be considered when a long distance (greater than 50 ft)
between the external device and J1-4 and 5 of the control is necessary.
Keypad (3) Command is from Keypad.
Network (4) Signal source is from a device on the network.
Composite Ref (5) The result of the Level 3 Composite Reference set by the user.
Opt1 Ana In1 (6) Scaled value of option board 1 analog input 1 signal value.
Opt1 Ana ln2 (7) Scaled value of option board 1 analog input 2 signal value.
EXB Pulse Foll (10) Signal source is from the EXB Pulse Follower expansion board.
ANA IN1 Type (1403) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
None (0) Input not used.
Potentiometer (1) 0 - 10V signal used.
ANA IN2 Type (1408) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 6
None (0) Input not used.
-10V to +10V (1) Bipolar 10V signal used.
-5V to +5V (2) Bipolar 5V signal used.
4 to 20 mA (3) 4-20mA current signal used.
0 to 20 mA (4) 0-20mA current signal used.
0 to 10V (5) Unipolar 10V signal used.
0 - 5V (6) Unipolar 5V signal used.
Defines signal being used.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
INPUT ANA IN1 Invert (1404) Preset Value: 0
SETUP ANA IN2 Invert (1409) Preset Value: 0
(Continued) Range: 0 - 1
Will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a low motor speed command
Off (0) and a maximum input voltage (e.g. 10VDC) to be a maximum motor speed
command.
Will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a maximum motor speed
On (1) command and a maximum input voltage (e.g. 10VDC) to be a low motor speed
command.
ANA IN1 Gain (1405) Preset Value: 100.0%
ANA IN2 Gain (1410) Preset Value: 100.0%
Range: 0.0% to 300.0%
Allows 0 to 300% gain to be applied ((as in Y=Gain*(X-Offset)).
ANA IN1 Offset (1406) Preset Value: 0.0
ANA IN2 Offset (1411) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: -100.0% to 100.0%
Provides an offset to the Analog Input to minimize signal error. For example, if
the minimum speed signal is 1VDC (instead of 0VDC) the Ana In1 Offset can
be set to -10% so the minimum voltage input is seen by the control as 0VDC.
This parameter is automatically adjusted during the auto tune Analog Offset
Trim test.
ANA IN1 Filter (1407) Preset Value: 0
ANA IN2 Filter (1413) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 6
No Filter (0) No Filtering.
Max Filter (6) Max Filtering.
Amount of low pass signal filtering to use.
ANA IN2 D.Band (1412) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0% to 75.0%
Allows a defined range of voltage to be a deadband. A command signal within
this range will not affect the control output. The deadband value is the voltage
above and below the zero command signal level.
EXT. CUR LIMIT (1414) Preset Value: 0
Only available in Open Vector Range: 0 - 1
mode. Ignore this parameter
for V/F mode.
Ramp output to speed loop is held at its present value as long as regen current
Off (0)
limit is active.
Ramp output to speed loop is always ramped to the value of its input and
the Iq current demand from the speed loop to the current loop is limited by
On (1)
the source defined in “Current Limit Source (P1415)” as a percentage of the
current level defined in “Peak Current Level (P2006)”.
CURR LMT SOURCE (1415) Preset Value: 0
Only available in Open Vector Range: 0 - 9
for V/F mode.
None (0) Turns off external current limit.
Connect a 0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA source to J1-4 and 5.
Analog In2 (2) 4-20mA should be considered when a long distance (up to 50 ft) between the
external device and J1-4 and 5 of the control is necessary.
Keypad (3) Turns off Current Limit Source from Keypad.
Composite Ref (4) See Chapter 11 for more information.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
INPUT CURR LMT SOURCE (1415)
SETUP Only available in Open Vector
(Continued) mode. Ignore this parameter
for V/F mode.
(Continued)
Selects analog input from high resolution analog input/output Expansion Board
Opt1 Ana In1 (5)
(EXBHH005) mounted in expansion slot 1.
Selects analog input from high resolution analog input/output Expansion Board
Opt1 Ana In2 (6)
(EXBHH005) mounted in expansion slot 1.
Selects analog input/output Expansion Board (EXBHH005) mounted in
Opt2 Ana In1 (7)
expansion slot 2.
Opt2 Ana In2 (8) expansion slot 2.
Network (9) Selects the network current limit word as the current limit source.
Selects the external current limit reference to be used, converts it internally to
a percentage and then sets the torque limit of the drive as a percentage of the
drive’s Peak Current Level (P2006).
SLEEP MODE (1416) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) No action.
Disables control when Command Source is less than CMD Sleep Band
On (1)
(P1417). Active in all speed modes.
CMD Sleep Band (1417) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0.00 to 100.00%
Disables the control when Command Source is less than CMD Sleep Band
(P1417). Active in all speed modes and is also applied to the torque reference
when in torque mode.
TORQUE FF SRC (1418) Preset Value: 0
Only available or active in Range: 0 - 8
Open Vector mode. Ignore
this parameter for V/F mode.
None (0) Turns off external torque feedforward reference.
Connect a 0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA source to J1-4 and 5.
Analog In2 (2) 4-20mA should be considered when a long distance (greater than 50 ft)
between the external device and J1-4 and 5 of the control is necessary.
Turns off external torque feedforward reference. (Keypad uses Local Keypad
Keypad (3)
Torque Reference as feedforward.)
Composite Ref (4) See Chapter 11 for more information.
Selects analog input from high resolution analog input/output expansion
Opt1 Ana In1 (5)
Board(EXBHH005) mounted in expansion slot 1.
Selects analog input from high resolution analog input/output expansion
Opt1 Ana In2 (6)
Board(EXBHH005) mounted in expansion slot 1.
Opt2 Ana In1 (7)
expansion slot 2.
Opt2 Ana In2 (8)
expansion slot 2.
Selects the external torque feedforward reference to be used which is added
to the torque demand from the speed loop. The result then becomes the
torque reference for the current loop.
1451 - 1474 Parameters 1451-1474 are used to configure the High Resolution Analog I/O
Expansion Board. See manual MN754 for configuration details.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
OUTPUT Digital Output 1 (1501) Preset Value: 1
SETUP Digital Output 2 (1502) Preset Value: 8
Relay Output 1 (1503) Preset Value: 9
Relay Output 2 (1504) Preset Value: 17
Range: 0 - 31
Drive Run (0) Active when drive is “On” and a FWD/REV direction command is present.
Drive Ready (1) Active after soft start, when drive is enabled and no faults are present.
(V/F) Active when drive is “Ready” and producing PWM to motor.
Drive On (2)
(Vector) Active when drive is “Ready” and motor flux is present.
Active when stop command is present and motor is stopped (or coasting to
Drive Stopped (3)
stop).
Jog (4) Active during Jog mode.
Accelerate (5) Active when control is accelerating.
Constant Speed (6) Active when control speed is constant.
Decelerate (7) Active when control is decelerating.
Active when motor speed is less than the Level 1 Output Setup “Zero SPD Set
At Zero Speed (8)
Pt (P1505)”.
Active when motor speed is within band set by the Level 1 Output Setup “At
At Speed (9)
Speed Band (P1506)”.
Active when output speed is at or greater than the Level 1 Output Setup “Set
At Set Speed (10)
Speed Point (P1507)”.
Curr Overload (11) Active when motor current is greater than “Overload Set Point (P1508)”.
Curr Underload (12) Active when motor current is less than “Underload Set Point (P1509)”.
I2T Overload (13) Active when overload left is less than 100%.
Keypad Control (14) Active when control is in Local keypad control.
Dynamic Brake (15) Active when Dynamic Brake transistor is turned ON.
Foldback (16) Active when current foldback is active (V/Hz Mode only).
Fault (17) Active when a fault condition is present (will cause trip).
Alarm (18) Active when an Alarm condition is present (but doesn’t cause trip).
Command Forward (19) Active during forward run command.
Command Reverse (20) Active during reverse run command.
Motor Forward (21) Active when motor is moving in Drive forward direction.
Motor Reverse (22) Active when motor is moving in Drive reverse direction.
Active when absolute process error is greater than P2606 (Process Error
Process Error (23)
Tolerance).
Network (24) Active when commanded by network. Network device controls this output.
Active when load is at position (|Position error|≤P1517) AND
At Position (25)
(|Motor Speed|≤P1505).
Active when load is moving (|Position error|>P1517) OR
In Motion (26)
(|Motor Speed|>P1505).
PLC (27) Output is controlled by PLC mode.
RTC (28) Output is controlled by RTC module.
Powered Up (29) Active when Bus is “UP” and no faults are present.
If drive is disabled, output turns on when table switch is commanded and will
Par Tbl Switch (30)
turn off when completed.
Heater (31) Output turns on when trickle current heating is active.
See also 1505, 1506, 1507, 1508, 1509, 1517, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
Chapter 12.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
OUTPUT Zero SPD Set PT (1505) Preset Value: 6.00
SETUP Range: 0 - MAX Speed
(Continued)
A digital output programmed to “At Zero Speed” becomes active when
motor speed becomes less than this setting for vector modes or when speed
demand is less than this setting when in V/F mode. This is useful when a motor
brake is to interlock operation with a motor.
At SPD Band (1506) Preset Value: 2.00
A digital output programmed to “At Speed” becomes active when the speed
error for vector modes or when the reference minus the demand for V/F mode
is less than the value set in this parameter.
Set Speed Point (1507) Preset Value: 60.00
A digital output programmed to “At Set Speed” becomes active when the
motor speed is greater than the value programmed in this parameter for vector
modes or when the speed demand is greater than the value programmed in
this parameter for V/F mode.This is useful when another machine must not
start or stop until the motor exceeds a predetermined speed.
Overload Set Pt (1508) Preset Value: 150.0
Range: 0.0 - 200.0%
Sets the motor current value as a percent of drive rated current at which the
Overload digital output is active.
Underload Set Pt (1509) Preset Value: 50.0
Range: 0.0 - 200.0%
Sets the motor current value as a percent of drive rated current at which the
Underload digital output is active.
Ana Out1 Type (1510) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
0 to +10V (0) Sets the Analog Output Signal to 0 - 10V.
0 to 5V (1) Sets the Analog Output Signal to 0 - 5V.
4mA to 20mA (2) Sets the Analog Output Signal to 4 - 20mA.
0mA to 20mA (3) Sets the Analog Output Signal to 0 - 20mA.
ANA OUT2 TYPE (1513) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 -1
+5/-5V (0) Sets the Output Signal ±5V.
+10/-10V (1) Sets the Output Signal ±10V.
ANA Out1 Signal (1511) Preset Value: 29
ANA Out2 Signal (1514) Preset Value: 3
Range: 0 - 34
Speed Ref (0) Scaled value of speed reference (input to velocity profiler) (ACC/DEC ramp).
Speed Demand (1) Scaled value of speed reference (output of velocity profiler) (ACC/DEC ramp).
ACC/DEC (2) Scaled value of ACC/DEC rate. Range is from 0 to max ACC/DEC rate.
Scaled value of Motor Current. Range is based on 2 times drive FLA. (Includes
Motor Current (3)
both MAG and Load currents).
Mag Current (4) Scaled value of magnetizing current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
The commanded D-axis PI vector magnetizing current to the current controller,
Mag Curr Cmd (5)
range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
Load Current (6) Scaled value of the load amps, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
The commanded Q-axis PI vector load current to the current controller, range
Load Curr Cmd (7)
is based on 2 times drive FLA.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
OUTPUT ANA Out1 Signal (1511)
SETUP ANA Out2 Signal (1514)
(Continued) (Continued)
Power Factor (8) Scaled value of power factor, range is from 0 to 1.0.
Scaled value of the phase 1 motor current, range is based on 2 times drive
Ph1 Current (9)
FLA.
Ph2 Current (10)
FLA.
Ph3 Current (11)
FLA.
Scaled value of the motor voltage, range is based on drive rated output
Motor Voltage (12)
voltage.
VD Demand (13) Flux controller output. Used to diagnose control problems.
VQ Demand (14) Load controller output. Used to diagnose control problems.
Scaled value of the Bus voltage. (Range is based on 123% of drive rated
Bus Voltage (15)
output voltage).
Scaled value of the absolute torque, range is based on peak torque (2 x rated
Est. Abs Torque (16)
torque).
Scaled value of the motor torque (signed), range is based on rated torque
Est. Torque (17)
(2 x rated torque).
Control Temp (18) Scaled value of the control heatsink temperature, range is -50 to 150ºC.
Analog In1 (19) Scaled value of the analog input 1 signal value.
Scaled value of the analog input 2 signal value, range depends on input type
Analog In2 (20)
P1408.
Scaled value of option board 1 analog input 1 signal value, range depends on
Opt1 Ana In1 (21)
input type selected.
Opt1 Ana In2 (22)
Opt2 Ana In1 (23)
Opt2 Ana In2 (24) input type selected.
Scaled value of the process feedforward signal, range is -100% to 100% of

Proc Feedforward (25) Process Feedforward signal.
Scaled value of the process feedback signal, range is -100% to 100% of

Proc Feedback (26)
Process Feedback signal.
Scaled value of the process setpoint source, range is -100% to 100% of
Proc Setpoint (27)
Process Setpoint signal.
Electric Angle (28) Scaled value of the electrical angle of shaft, range is from 0-359 degrees.
Scaled value (absolute) of actual motor speed, range is 0-Max Motor Speed
Abs Speed (29)
P2003.
Scaled value (signed) of actual motor speed, range is - Max Motor Speed to
Velocity (30)
+Max Motor Speed P2003.
Represents the network speed reference, see MN744. Analog 1 holding
Network (31)
register is 40014:40013, Analog 2 holding register is 40016:40015.
Scaled value of the Composite Reference output, range is -100% to 100% of
Composite Ref (32)
composite reference calculation.
Power (kW) (33) Scaling power calculated using nominal output amps and RMS output volts.
Calibrate (34) Produces maximum value of selected analog output type.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
OUTPUT ANA OUT1 GAIN (1512) Preset Value: 100.0
SETUP ANA OUT2 GAIN (1515) Preset Value: 100.0
(Continued) Range: 0.0 – 500.0%
Scale factor for analog output (as in Y=Gain*X).
CAL ANA OUT (1516) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: -100.0% to 100.0%
Scalable output signal used to calibrate output device (-100% to 100% of
Analog Out 1 Type).
The drive at position target if (|Position-Feedback|) < Band.
1551 - 1562 Parameters 1551 - 1562 are used to configure the High Resolution Analog I/O
Expansion Board. See manual MN754 for configuration details.
MOTOR CONTROL TYPE (1601) Preset Value: 0
CONTROL Range: 0 - 1
V/F Control (0) Sets the control type to V/F Control.
Open Vector (1) Sets the control type to Open Vector.
CNTL BASE SPEED (1602) Preset Value: Motor Rated Speed (P2403)
The speed at which Field Weakening begins.
CNTL BASE VOLT (1611) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - Drive Rated Voltage
for Open Vector mode.
The voltage output to the motor at Control Base Speed (P1602). Typically set
to motor rated voltage.
STATIC BOOST (1612) Preset Value: 0.0
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.0 - 15.0%
Additional voltage applied to motor at start-up.
DYN BOOST CUTIN (1613) Preset Value: 30.00
Only available or active in V/F Range: 6.00 - 60.00 Hz
Speed at which dynamic boost takes full effect.
DYNAMIC BOOST (1614) Preset Value: 0.0
The Dynamic Boost parameter can be adjusted to provide more or less running
torque from the motor than is available with the factory setting. The boost
adjustment alters the output voltage to the motor from the normal voltage
value by increasing or decreasing the voltage per frequency unit as defined by
the V/F profile.
V/F EFFICIENCY (1615) Preset Value: 0
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Smoothing disabled.
On (1) Smooting enabled.
Smooths transitions between static boost and V/F curve.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
MOTOR V/F PROFILE (1616) Preset Value: 0
CONTROL Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.0 - 100.0%
0 = Linear Set the Volts/Frequency ratio of the control output (to the motor) for all values
100 = Quadratic of output voltage versus output frequency up to the control base frequency.
Because motor voltage is related to motor current, motor voltage can then
be related to motor torque. A change in the V/F profile can adjust how much
torque is available from the motor at various speeds.
V/F Profile Curve

Control Base Volt
(P1611)
Output
0%
Volts
50%
100%
Static Base
Boost Output Frequency Freq.
CUSTOM V/F CURVE (1617) Preset Value: 0

Off (0) Curve set in parameter “V/F Profile” (P1616).
Allows two linear V/F segments by setting the V/F 3 Point Volts and V/F 3 Point
3 Point (1)
Frequency parameters.
Allows six linear V/F segments by setting the 7-Point voltage and frequency
7 Point (2)
values.
Allows custom V/F Curve profile settings to taylor the V/F Curve to specific
applications for optimum performance. Only available or active when “Control
Type” (P1601) is set to PM V/F Control. Takes precedence over “V/F Profile”
(P1616).
3 Point Method Curve
Control Base Volt
(P1611)
Output
Volts
3 PT
Volts 3 PT Freq.
Static Base
Boost Output Frequency Freq.
3 POINT VOLTAGE (1618) Preset Value: 50.0

The output voltage associated with the 3 Point Frequency parameter.
Calculated as a percentage of drive rated output voltage.
3 POINT FREQ (1619) Preset Value: 30.00
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.00 - MAX Speed
The output frequency associated with the 3 Point Volts parameter.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
MOTOR SLIP COMP ENABLE (1620) Preset Value: 0
CONTROL Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Slip compensating disabled.
On (1) Slip compensating enabled.
Compensates for change in slip due to varying load conditions during normal
operation to maintain constant rotor speed.
7 POINT FREQ 1 (1621) Preset Value: 10
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - MAX Speed
Coupled with the 7 Point Voltage parameters to set the frequency portion of
the breakpoints in the 7-point V/F curve.
7 POINT VOLT 1 (1622) Preset Value: 16.7
Only available or active in V/F Range 0.0 - 100.0%
Coupled with the 7 Point Frequency parameters to set the voltage portion of
the breakpoints in the 7-point V/F curve.
CURR PROP GAIN (1633) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in Range: 0.00 - 150.00
Sets the current loop proportional gain.
CURR INT GAIN (1634) Preset Value: 150.00
Only available or active in Range: 0.0 - 3000.00 Hz
Sets the current loop integral gain.
SPEED PROP GAIN (1635) Preset Value: 5.00
Sets the speed (velocity) loop proportional gain. Excessive speed prop gain will
cause ringing around the set point. Decreasing the speed prop gain will result
in slower response and decrease the ringing, but will increase the overshoot.
SPEED INT GAIN (1636) Preset Value: 10.00
Sets the speed (velocity) loop integral gain.
SPEED DIFF GAIN (1637) Preset Value: 0.00
Sets the speed (velocity) loop differential gain.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
MOTOR A.S. PROP GAIN (1639) Preset Value: 10.0
CONTROL Only available or active in Range: 0.0 - 255.0
(Continued) Open Vector mode. Ignore
Sets the anti-saturation proportional gain.
A.S. INT GAIN (1640) Preset Value: 50.00
Sets the anti-saturation integral gain.
MOTOR Xm (1641) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in Range: 0.00 - 1000.00Ω
Sets the Motor magnetizing reactance value at 60 Hz.
MOTOR R1 (1642) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0.00 - 1000.00Ω
Stator resistance in ohms. If set too high, the motor will tend to stall at zero
speed when reversing or accelerating from low speed. Reducing this value
may eliminate the problem. When too low, speed regulation may suffer. If
V/F mode, used for IR drop compensation. Must set to zero for multi-motor
applications.
MOTOR X1 (1643) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in Range: 0.000 - 1000.000Ω
Stator leakage reactance, in ohms at 60Hz. This parameter has most impact
when reversing motor rotation at full current limit. If set too low, the decel time
will tend to increase.
ROTOR TIME CONST (1644) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0.000 - 60.000 seconds
Sets the rotor time constant value.
MOTOR R2 (1645) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in Range: 0 - 1000Ω
Sets the Motor rotor resistance value.
MOTOR X2 (1646) Preset Value: CALC
Only available or active in Range: 0 - 1000Ω
Sets the Motor rotor leakage reactance value.
TRICKLE HEAT AMPS (1678) Preset Value: 0.0
Range 0.0 - 50.0% of Motor Rated Amps
Used to provide heating amps in the motor windings while the motor is
stopped to help eliminate condensation within the motor. A value of 0.0 amps
in this parameter disables the function. A non-zero value will cause the amount
of amps programmed in this parameter to flow through the motor windings
after the motor is stopped and a 300 second delay. Both the REV and FWD
LEDs on the keypad will flash while the timer is counting and then both LEDs
are on solid when trickle current is flowing.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
COMMUNI- BAUD RATE (1701) Preset Value: 1
CATION Range: 0 - 4
9600 (0) Baud Rate = 9600
19200 (1) Baud Rate = 19200
38400 (2) Baud Rate = 38400
56000 (3) Baud Rate = 56000
115200 (4) Baud Rate = 115200
Sets the Modbus-RTU communication baud rate.
PARITY (1702) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 2
None (0) No parity used.
Odd (1) Odd parity used.
Even (2) Even parity used.
Sets Modbus-RTU communication parity.
STOP BITS (1703) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
One (0) One stop bit used.
Two (1) Two stop bits used.
Sets the number of stop bits to use for Modbus-RTU.
DRIVE ADDRESS (1704) Preset Value: 1
Range: 1 - 247
Sets the drive address for communication via USB or Modbus-RTU.
OPT CARD RESET (1705) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
Off (0) No Action.
Slot 1 (1) Reset Expansion Board in slot 1.
Slot 2 (2) Reset Expansion Board in slot 2.
Slots 1 & 2 (3) Resets both Expansion boards 1 & 2.
Sends a power up reset command to all expansion boards, slot 1 only, or slot
2 only.
SECURITY DEFAULT (1706) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No Action.
Yes (1) Reset settings.
Restores factory settings to Browser User ID and Password.
BROWSER USER ID Preset Value: baldor
(1707) (1708)
ASCII user ID for the Ethernet Web Browser Option Board if installed.
BROWSER PASSWORD Preset Value: baldor
(1709) (1710)
Password for the Ethernet Web Browser Option Board if installed.
1720 - 1796 See documentation provided with communications expansion board.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
DRIVE OPERATING ZONE (2001) Preset Value: 0
LIMITS Range: 0 - 3
Std Const Trq (0) Sets the PWM operating zone to Standard 2.5kHz output carrier frequency
Constant Torque. Constant Torque allows 175% for 3 seconds and 150% for 60
seconds of peak overload capacity.
Std Var Trq (1) Sets the PWM operating zone to Standard 2.5kHz output carrier frequency
Variable Torque. Variable Torque allows 125% for 1 second and 115% for 60
Quiet Const Trq (2) Sets the PWM operating zone to Quiet 8.0kHz output carrier frequency
Constant Torque. Constant Torque allows 175% for 3 seconds and 150% for 60
Quiet Var Trq (3) Sets the PWM operating zone to Quiet 8.0kHz output carrier frequency Variable
Torque. Variable Torque allows 125% for 1 second and 115% for 60 seconds of
peak overload capacity.
MIN OUTPUT SPEED (2002) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - MAX Speed Hz
Sets the minimum motor speed in Hz. During operation, the motor speed
will not decrease below this value except for motor starts or during dynamic
braking to a stop.
MAX OUTPUT SPEED (2003) Preset Value: Rated Motor Speed
Range: 10 - 500 Hz
Sets the maximum motor speed in Hz.
PWM FREQUENCY (2004) Preset Value: 2500
Range: 1500 - 16000Hz
The frequency that the output transistors are switched. PWM (pulse width
modulation) frequency is also referred to as “Carrier” frequency. PWM should
be as low as possible to minimize stress on the output transistors and motor
windings. It is recommended that the PWM frequency be set to approximately
15 times the maximum output frequency of the control. Ratios less than 15 will
result in non-Sinusoidal current waveforms.
CURR RATE LIMIT (2005) Preset Value: 0.004
Only available or active in Range: 0.000 - 10.000 seconds
Open Vector mode. Ignore this
parameter for V/F mode.
Limits the rate of torque change in response to a torque command. This
parameter sets the time in seconds to change the output torque by 1 times
motor rated torque.
PEAK CURR LEVEL (2006) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0 - Peak Rated Current
(Vector) Sets maximum motor current level for operation.
(V/F) Sets the motor current (including MAG current) where foldback begins.
REGEN TORQ LIMIT (2007) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0.0 - Drive Rated Peak Current in amps
Sets the maximum motor current (not including MAG current allowed during
regen. Based upon brake resistor ohms programmed in P2501.
REGEN ADJUST (2008) Preset Value: 0
Only available or active in V/F Range 0 - 500 Hz/Sec
mode. Ignore this parameter for
Open Vector mode.
Used to increase the drive output frequency to the motor when regen current
is greater than 1/10th of current limit to avoid overvoltages when applying the
drive with cyclic regenerative loads such as pump jacks.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
DRIVE SPEED UNITS (2101) Preset Value: 0
CONFIG Range: 0 - 1
Hz (0) Sets units to Frequency, Hz.
RPM (1) Sets units to RPM.
LANGUAGE SELECT (2102) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
English (0) Sets English as displayed text.
Sets "OTHER", (Spanish, German, Italian, French, or Portuguese) English and
one language can be stored (Spanish, German, Italian, French and Portuguese).
Other (1)
Standard firmware allows English and Spanish. For other languages, language
tables must be loaded into the drive’s language flash area.
FACTORY SETTINGS (2103) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No Action.
Restores factory settings for all parameters. (Overwrites all stored values for all
Yes (1)
four parameter tables).
SECURITY (2105) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
Off (0) Security not enabled.
Local (1) Security enabled for keypad only.
Network (2) Security enabled for Network only.
Total (3) Security enabled for both Keypad and Network.
Enables Security.
ACCESS TIMEOUT (2106) Preset Value: 5.0
If security is enabled and program mode is entered, the access code must be
correctly entered. After parameters are changed and program mode exited this
timer begins to timeout. If program mode is accessed after timeout, the security
code must be entered a second time.
ACCESS CODE (2107) Preset Value: 9999
Range: 0 - 9999
Sets security code for login required to access locked parameters.
ACTIVE PARAM TBL (0052) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
T1 (0) Table 1 is used as active parameter set.
Note: This parameter is not actually in the Level 2 Blocks. It is Parameter 0052
in the MONITOR block if using Workbench.
CLEAR FAULT LOG (2108) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No Action.
Yes (1) Deletes all fault log entries and trace values.
DEAD TIME COMP (2109) Preset Value: 100.0
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 to 100.0%
mode. Ignore this parameter for
Open Vector mode.
Compensates for voltage loss due to switching dead time at the PWM output.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
DRIVE POWER INPUT (2110) Preset Value: 2
CONFIG Range: 0 - 3
(Continued)
The output values are derated for single phase operation.
Note: For three phase power input, if a phase is lost this parameter will
Single Phase (0)
automatically be changed to single phase and the control will automatically be
derated for single phase operation.
Selected when only DC input power (master) is available. Do not choose if AC
Common Bus Slave (1) power is connected. Common bus setting disables precharge and soft start
features of the control.
Three Phase (2) Standard operation.
Common Bus Master (3) Selected for special installations, three phase with common bus slave support.
The Power base senses the control power base (single or three phase). If
connecting a three phase control to a single phase power source, change value
from 2 to 0 to avoid “Loss of Phase” trips.
BUS VOLT FILTER (2111) Preset Value: 10.00
Only available or active in V/F. Range: 0.10 - 1000.00 Hz
Ignore for Open Vector mode.
Sets the cutoff frequency for the BUS Voltage Filter (used to demodulate the
BUS).
EXECUTE MACRO (2112) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 5
No (0) Do not execute macro.
M1 (1) Execute Macro M1.
Executes the selected macro one time. A macro is a list of parameter numbers
and values that when executed set the respective parameters in the list to the
predefined values.
UNDO MACRO (2113) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) Don’t undo macro.
Value in the parameter Macro Status (P116) is read and that macro is undone
Yes (1) (factory settings are restored for values modified by that macro).
TORQ ENABLE SEQ (2114) Preset Value: 0

Range: 0 - 1
Torque On Enable (0) Regulates motor torque any time the drive is enabled.
Regulates motor torque only after the drive has received a run forward or run
Torque On Command (1)
reverse command.
This parameter determines whether the drive starts regulating motor torque
immediately upon closure of the drive enable input (J2-8) or only after the
drive receives a forward/reverse command input. Only effective during remote
operation while in open vector mode.
DRIVE EXTERNAL TRIP (2201) Preset Value: 0
PROTECT Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) External Trip is disabled.
External Trip is enabled. If a normally closed contact at J2-16 is opened, an
On (1)
External Trip fault will occur and cause the drive to shut down.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
DRIVE FOLLOWING ERROR (2202) Preset Value: 0
PROTECT Only available or active in Open Range: 0 - 1
(Continued) Vector mode. Ignore for V/F
mode.
Off (0) Control ignores “At Speed Error” from the process.
Control monitors the following error from the process. If the process speed is
On (1) outside the range set in the Level 1 Output block, At Speed Band parameter,
the drive will fault and will disable.
TORQUE PROVING (2203) Preset Value: 0
Only available or active in Open Range: 0 - 1
Vector mode. Ignore for V/F
mode.
Off (0) Control ignores unbalanced motor phases.
Control looks for balanced output current in all three phases to the motor.
On (1) Unbalanced output current will cause a trip and create a torque proving fault.
This occurs after establishing flux current in the motor.
FOLDBACK GAIN (2205) Preset Value: 0.010
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.000 - 10.000
mode. Ignore for Open Vector
mode.
Sets the rate of change of output frequency during current limit.
OVERLOAD (2206) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 2
Fault (0) Drive will fault and disable PWM to motor if overload capability is exceeded.
Drive attempts to reduce current to 80% of Drive rated current so that time
Foldback (1)
remaining can count back up.
Drive attempts to reduce current to 100% of drive rated current so that time
Hold (2)
remaining can hold at present value.
Sets how the control handles I2T power overloads. When an overload occurs it
will either Fault, Foldback, or Hold based on the control output AMPS.
OVERLOAD TRIGGER (2207) Preset Value: 50.0
mode.
Sets the trigger point for an overload condition.
SINGLE PHASING (2209) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
When an input power phase is lost, single phase operation is assumed and
Derate (0) control output is derated by 50% and operation is allowed at the reduced
output.
When input power phase is lost for approximately 10 cycles, control trips on
Fault (1)
fault.
Single Phasing Not available for size AA controls.
OVER TEMPERATURE (2210) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
When control temperature reaches 80°C (standard or 90°C quiet mode),
output is derated by 30% (current limiting) and operation is allowed at the
Derate (0)
reduced value. Operation at full current is allowed when control temperature
decreases to 70°C. If control temperature reaches 85°C, control trips on fault.
Fault (1) When control temperature reaches 85°C, control trips on fault.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
DRIVE PWR DOWN OPTIONS (2211) Preset Value: 0
PROTECT Range: 0 -1
(Continued)
Fault (0) If Control is enabled it will trip on a fault, (disable) while powering down.
Control wil decelerate attempting to maintain DC Bus voltage and continue
Ride Through (1)
operation.
Determines how the drive responds to a line loss.
CNTL STP BUS LVL (2212) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 200 to 800V
Active during a power loss ride-through. Sets the DC bus level at which a
controlled stop may be triggered.
CNTL STOP DELAY (2213) Preset Value: 1.0
Range: 0 to 3600.0 Seconds
Active during a power loss controlled stop or ride-through. Sets the delay time
required after a controlled stop before drive enable.
Kp RIDE THROUGH (2214) Preset Value: 10.0000
Range: 0 to 1000.0000
Proportional gain of PI controller for power loss ride through.
Ki RIDE THROUGH (2215) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 to 1000.0000
Integral gain of PI controller for power loss ride through.
MISCELLA- AUTO RESTART (2301) Preset Value: 1
NEOUS Range: 0 - 3
If set to Manual and a run command (enable signal & FWD or REV command)
is present at power up, the motor will not run. The run command must be
removed then reapplied to start operation. The run command refers to the
enable plus direction (FWD or REV) signals. Restart after Fault - If a fault occurs
Manual (0) during operation, the control must be reset and the run command must be
removed then reapplied to start operation. Note: If Restarts/Hr (P2302) is zero,
the control must be manually reset. If Restarts/Hr (P2302) is non-zero, the
control will automatically attempt to reset the fault but will not restart until the
run command is removed then reapplied to start operation.
If a run command (enable signal & FWD or REV command) is present at power
At Powerup (1) up, the control will automatically start. Auto restarts enabled at power up but
disabled after a fault.
If a fault occurs during operation, the control will automatically reset (after the
After Fault (2) restart delay time) to resume operation if the Restarts/Hr (P2302) is set to a non
zero value. Auto restarts disabled at power up but enabled after a fault.
Auto restarts active at power up and after faults. 3 Wire modes, AUTO start
after a fault or loss of power will not occur because the momentary contacts
Both (3)
are open and the run command must again be applied. The run command
refers to the enable plus direction (FWD or REV) lines.
RESTARTS/HOUR (2302) Preset Value: 3
Range: 0 - 10
The maximum number of automatic restart attempts before requiring a manual
restart. After one hour without reaching the maximum number of faults or if
power is turned off and on again, the fault count is reset to zero.
RESTART DELAY (2203) Preset Value: 3
Range: 0 - 3600 seconds
Sets the time delay after a fault occurs before a fault reset and automatic
restart are attemped. If the fault reset is successful, the restart will occur. If not
successful, a new delay occurs. Useful to allow sufficient time to clear a fault
condition before restart is attempted.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
MISCELLA- PWM TECHNIQUE (2304) Preset Value: 1
NEOUS Range: 0 - 1
(Continued)
Space Vector (0) Utilizes Vector Orientation to determine pulse firing.
Sine Triangle (1) Utilizes Sine/Triangle Waveform Intersect technique to determine pulse widths.
Sets the method used to generate the motor voltage PWM signal.
COST OF ENERGY (2305) Preset Value: 0.10
Range: 0.00 - 99999.00$/KWH
Sets the billing cost per KWH charged by the local power utility.
RESET ENERGY (2306) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No Action.
Yes (1) Resets the energy counter (in power base of the control).
FILTER TYPE (2309) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
None (0) Sets the auxiliary filter to None.
Low Pass (1) Sets the auxiliary filter to Low Pass.
High Pass (2) Sets the auxiliary filter to High Pass.
Notch (3) Sets the auxiliary filter to Notch.
FILTER SOURCE (2310) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 9
None (0) Sets the auxiliary filter to None.
Raw Speed (1) Sets the auxiliary filter to Raw Speed.
Torque (2) Sets the auxiliary filter to Torque Loop.
Analog In1 (3) Sets the auxiliary filter to Analog In1.
Analog In2 (4) Sets the auxiliary filter to Analog In2.
Composite Ref (5) Sets the auxiliary filter to Composite Reference
Opt1 Ana In1 (6) Sets the auxiliary filter to Opt1 Ana In1.
FILTER DEST (2311) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 6
None (0) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to None.
Speed Loop (1) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Speed Loop.
Torque Loop (2) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Torque Loop.
Speed FFWD (3) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Speed Forward.
Process FBK (4) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Process Feedback.
Process FFWD (5) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Process Feedforward.
Process SP (6) Sets the Filter Destination, (Output), to Process Setpoint.
FILTER CUTOFF (2312) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0.00 - 1000.00Hz
Sets the cutoff frequency of the auxiliary filter (a low value = slower response).
NOTCH CNTR FREQ (2313) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0.00 - 500.00Hz
Sets the center frequency for the notch filter (if Filter Type=Notch).

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
MISCELLA- NOTCH BAND (2314) Preset Value: 0.00
NEOUS Range: 0.00 - 200.00Hz
(Continued
Sets the frequency band of the notch filter (if Filter Type=Notch).
MOTOR MOTOR RATED VOLT (2401) Preset Value: CALC
DATA Range: 0 - 1000 Volts
The rated voltage of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
MOTOR RATED AMPS (2402) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0 - MAX AMPS
The rated current of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
MOTOR RATED SPD (2403) Preset Value: 1754
Range: 0 - 30000 RPM
The rated speed of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
MOTOR RATED FREQ (2404) Preset Value: 60.00
Range: 10.00 - 500.00
The rated frequency of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
MOTOR MAG AMPS (2405) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0 - 90% MAX AMPS
The motor magnetizing current value (listed on the motor nameplate) also called
no load current. Measure using a clamp on amp meter on a motor lead while
the motor is running at line frequency with no load connected to the motor
shaft.
INSTABILITY FREQ (2406) Preset Value: 0.00
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.00 - 500.00Hz
mode.
If the motor exhibits instability (usually no load) this parameter should be set to
the center of the instability band.
STABILITY GAIN (2407) Preset Value: 0.000
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.000 - 10.000
mode.
Sets the amount of correction to stabilize the motor.
ELEC SLIP FREQ (2412) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 0.000 - 20.000Hz
Sets the rated slip frequency of the motor.
CALC MOTOR MODEL (2414) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No presets are calculated.
Yes (1) Loads preset values into memory that are required to perform auto tune.
REVERSE ROTATION (2415) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Standard rotation not changed.
Control output phase change to reverse rotation direction without motor wiring
On (1)
change.
MOTOR RATED HP (2416) Preset Value: CALC
Range 0 - 4 times Drive Rated HP
Used to record the motor nameplate horsepower.
BRAKE RESISTOR OHMS (2501) Preset Value: CALC
ADJUST Range: 0.00 - 255.0Ω
The dynamic braking resistor value in ohms. Refer to dynamic braking manual
for additional information.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
BRAKE RESISTOR WATTS (2502) Preset Value: CALC
ADJUST Range: 0 - 999999W
(Continued)
The dynamic braking resistor watts rating.
RESISTOR TTC (2503) Preset Value: CALC
Range: 20 – 3600 seconds
Sets the time for heat dissipation for the dynamic braking resistor. If 2X watts
is dissipated continuously “Regen R Fault” will occur in the time set by this
parameter. If 3x watts is dissipated continuously, “Regen R Fault” will occur in
½ the time set by this parameter.
DC BRAKE VOLTS (2504) Preset Value: 0.00
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - 20.00%
mode.
The amount of DC braking voltage applied to the motor windings during a
stop command. Increase this value for more braking torque during stops. The
increased braking voltage may cause the motor to overheat for applications
that require frequent starts/stops. Be careful in selecting this value. The
maximum DC Brake Voltage = (1.414) X (Max Output Volts) X 20%.
DC BRAKE TRIGGER (2505) Preset Value: 0.00
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.00 - 50.00Hz
mode.
The frequency at which dc injection braking will begin.
BRAKE ON STOP (2506) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) DC Injection Braking not active.
On (1) Enables DC Injection Braking.
DC injection braking will begin when a stop command is issued. After a stop
command, the DC brake voltage will be applied to the motor windings when the
output frequency reaches the DC brake trigger.
BRAKE ON REVERSE (2507) Preset Value: 0
mode.
Off (0) Brake on Reverse not active.
On (1) DC Injection Braking enabled on a "Change Motor Rotation Direction”
command.
DC Injection braking will begin after a change-motor-rotation command is
issued. After a stop command, the DC brake voltage will be applied to the
motor windings when the output frequency reaches the DC brake trigger.
Braking continues until the motor is stopped or until stop brake time is
exhausted. The motor will then accelerate in the opposite direction.
STOP BRAKE TIME (2508) Preset Value: 0.0
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.0 - 60.0 seconds
mode.
The maximum number of seconds that DC injection brake voltage will be
applied to the motor windings after a stop command. After the time specified
by this value, DC injection braking is automatically turned off. If DC injection
braking starts at a frequency less than the DC brake trigger parameter, the stop
brake time is calculated as follows:
BrakeTime = StopBrakeTime X (OutputFrequencyatBraking / DCBrakeTrigger)

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
BRAKE BRAKE ON START (2509) Preset Value: 0
ADJUST Only available or active in V/F Range: 0 - 1
(Continued) mode. Ignore for Open Vector
mode.
Off (0) Brake on Start not active.
On (1) Enables Brake on Start.
ON turns DC injection braking ON for a period of time (Start Brake Time) when
a run command is issued. This ensures the motor is not rotating. Braking will
automatically turn off and the motor will accelerate at the end of the start brake
time.
START BRAKE TIME (2510) Preset Value: 0.0
Only available or active in V/F Range: 0.0 - 60.0 seconds
mode.
The amount of time that DC injection braking will be applied after a run
command is issued. This will only occur if brake on start is set to ON. Braking
may cause the motor to overheat for applications that require frequent starts/
stops. Be careful in selecting this value. The start brake time should be just
long enough to ensure the motor shaft is not rotating when a start command is
issued.
PROCESS PROCESS TYPE (2601) Preset Value: 0
None (0) PID is disabled, however feedforward is always available.
The process error computed as: PE = (Set Point) - (Feedback). Useful when
Forward Acting (1)
feedback increases as motor speed increases.
The process error computed as: PE =(Feedback) - (Set Point). Useful when
Reverse Acting (2)
feedback decreases as motor speed increases.
Sets the type of PID control.
SETPOINT ADJ LIM (2602) Preset Value: 10.0
Range: 0.0 - 100.0%
Sets as a percent of motor speed. It limits speed corrections due to process
error.
PROC FEEDBACK (2603) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 10
None (0) No feedback assigned.
Setpoint Cmd (1) Setpoint command value used for feedback.
Loc Speed Ref (2) Local speed reference used for feedback.
Analog In1 (3) Analog Input 1 signal used for feedback.
Analog In2 (4) Analog Input 2 signal used for feedback.
Network (5) Network value used for feedback.
Composite Ref (6) Output of Composite Ref signal used for feedback.
Opt1 Ana In1 (7) Option 1, Analog Input 1 used for feedback.
Sets the type of signal used for the process feedback signal.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
PROCESS SETPOINT SOURCE (2604) Preset Value: 0
(Continued)
None (0) Source of Process Loop Setpoint is not defined.
Setpoint Cmd (1) Setpoint command value used for Setpoint.
Loc Speed Ref (2) Local speed reference used for Setpoint.
Analog In1 (3) Analog Input 1 signal used for Setpoint.
Analog In2 (4) Analog Input 2 signal used for Setpoint.
Network (5) Network value used for Setpoint.
Composite Ref (6) Output of Composite Ref signal used for Setpoint.
Opt1 Ana In1 (7) Option 1, Analog Input 1 used for Setpoint.
Sets the source input signal type to which the process feedback will be
compared. If “Setpoint CMD” is selected, the fixed value of the set point is
entered in the Setpoint Command parameter value.
SETPOINT COMMAND (2605) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Sets the value as a percentage of the process feedback signal; the control will
try to maintain by adjusting motor speed. This is only used when the Setpoint
Source is a fixed value “Setpoint CMD” under Setpoint Source.
PROC ERR TOL (2606) Preset Value: 10.0
Range: 0.0 - 100.0%
The band within which the Opto or Relay Output is active (turned ON) indicating
the process is within the desired range.
PROC PROP GAIN (2607) Preset Value: 1.0000
Range: 0.0000 - 9999.9990
Sets the PID loop proportional gain. Determines how much adjustment to motor
speed is due to process error.
PROC INTG GAIN (2608) Preset Value: 0.0000
Range: 0.0000 - 9999.9990
Sets the PID loop Integral gain. Determines how quickly the motor speed is
adjusted to correct long term error.
PROC INTG CLAMP (2609) Preset Value: 100.0
Range: 0.0 - 100.0%
Sets the level of the Integrator clamp as a percentage of maximum motor
speed.
PROC DIFF GAIN (2610) Preset Value: 0.0000
Range: 0.0000 - 9999.9990
Sets the PID loop differential gain. This determines how much adjustment to
motor speed is made for transient error.
PROFILE ADJUST (2611) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) No adjustment is made.
ACC/DEC group is selected based upon comparing process error to Profile
On (1)
Adjust Band (P2612).

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
PROCESS PROFILE ADJ BAND (2612) Preset Value: 50.0
CONTROL Range: 0 - 200.0%
(Continued)
Active when Profile Adjust (P2611) is ON. If process error is within this band,
ACC/DEC Group 1 is used. If process error is outside this band, ACC/DEC 2
is used. Useful when the PID’s response needs to differ when process error is
small as compared to when it is large.
PROC SLEEP BAND (2613) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: 0 - 100.0%
Non-zero - Enables process PID sleep mode. When Process error remains
within this band for 5 seconds, sleep mode is active (control is disabled, motor
coasts). If at any time the process error moves out of this band, sleep mode is
terminated and normal PID operation is resumed.
Zero - Disables sleep mode.
PROC OUT FILTER (2614) Preset Value: 0.00
Sets the amount of filtering for the PID process output.
PROC OUT OFFSET (2615) Preset Value: 0.0
Range: -100.0 - 100.0%
Sets the amount of offset for the PID process output.
PROC OUT GAIN (2616) Preset Value: 100.0
Range: 0.0 - 200.0%
Sets the amount of gain for the PID process output.
SKIP FRE- SKIP FREQ 1 (2701) Preset Value: 0.00
QUENCY SKIP FREQ 2 (2703) Preset Value: 0.00
SKIP FREQ 3 (2705) Preset Value: 0.00
The center frequency of the frequency band to skip or treat as a deadband.
Three bands can be defined independently or the three values can be selected
to skip one wide frequency band.
SKIP BAND 1 (2702) Preset Value: 0.00
Defines the width of the band on either side of the Skip Frequency. The drive is
not allowed to operate continuously at any point within a range defined by the
Skip Frequency and the Skip Band. The lower boundary of this band is equal
to the Skip Frequency minus the Skip Band. The upper boundary of this band
is equal to the Skip Frequency plus the Skip Band. If the speed reference is
set to a value between the lower boundary and the upper boundary, the drive
will operate at the lower boundary when the band is being approached from
a speed less than the lower boundary. If the band is being approached from
a speed greater than the upper boundary, the drive will operate at the upper
boundary. Should the speed reference be set to a value outside the band, then
the drive will ramp through the band using the normal ACC/DEC settings. For
example, if Skip Frequency 1 (P2701) is set to 20Hz and Skip Band 1 (P2702)
is set to 5Hz, then the lower boundary of the band is at 15Hz and the upper
boundary of the band is at 25Hz.
SYNCHRO SYNC START FWD (2801) Preset Value: 0
START Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Synchro Start Forward feature not active.
On (1) Synchro Start Forward feature active.
Synchro Start Forward feature begins scanning motor rotational frequency in
the drive forward direction. If on, scan always starts in FWD direction even if
P2802 is ON.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
SYNCHRO SYNC START REV (2802) Preset Value: 0
START Range: 0 - 1
(Continued)
Off (0) Synchro Start Reverse feature not active.
On (1) Synchro Start Reverse feature active.
Synchro Start feature begins scanning motor rotational frequency in the drive
reverse direction. If P2801 is ON, scan always starts in FWD direction even if
P2802 is ON.
SYNC AT MAX FREQ (2803) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 1
Off (0) Synchro at Max Frequency feature not active.
On (1) Synchro at Max Frequency feature active.
Allows the Synchro Start feature to begin scanning motor rotational frequency
at the MAX Frequenhcy (On) or at the last speed reference command (Off).
SYNCHRO SCAN V/F (2804) Preset Value: 10.0 % V/F – 10% Open Vector
Range: 1.0 - 25.0%
Sets the Volts/Hertz ratio for the Synchro Start feature as a percentage of the
V/F ratio defined by the “Control Base Volts/Control Base Frequency”. This
Synchro Scan V/F percentage value is multiplied by the “Control Base Volts/
Control Base Frequency” value. If this value is too high, the inverter may fault
on Overcurrent.
SYNC SETUP TIME (2805) Preset Value: 0.20 V/F – 0.10 Open Vector
The time at max frequency (or last reference) before scanning begins. Allows
motor currents to settle before scanning starts. Active in both forward and
reverse directions.
SYNC SCAN TIME (2806) Preset Value: 2.0 V/F – 0.50 Open Vector
The maximum time allowed for Synchro Start to scan and detect rotor speed
in either direction. Scanning begins at the Start at MAX Frequency to 0Hz.
Generally, the shorter the Synchro Scan Time the more likely a false Synchro
Start will be detected. This value should be set high enough to eliminate false
Synchro Starts. This time applies in each direction.
SYNC RECOVER (2807) Preset Value: 1.0 V/F – 0.10 Open Vector
This time applies after the synchro frequency has been found. It is the amount
of time given to ramp the voltage from the synchro start V/F ratio voltage level
to the full V/F voltage level required by the motor.
AUTO ANA OFFSET TRIM (2901) Preset Value: 0
TUNE Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No action.
Measures analog offset for all analog inputs. Set analog inputs to zero before
Yes (1)
executing.
ONE-STEP TUNING (2902) Preset Value: 0
mode.
No (0) No action.
Performs one step auto tune. (Prompts for “Press Enter” before a rotational test
Yes (1)
is performed).
STATOR R1 TUNE (2903) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
No (0) No action.
Yes (1) Measures Stator Resistance. Stationary test will not cause motor shaft rotation.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
AUTO MEASURE Xm (ROT) (2904) Preset Value: 0
TUNE Only available or active in Open Range: 0 - 1
(Continued) Vector mode. Ignore for V/F
mode.
No (0) No action.
Measures MAG Reactance. This is a rotational test. Load should be decoupled
Yes (1)
from the motor.
MEASURE LEAKAGE (2905) Preset Value: 0
mode.
No (0) No action.
Yes (1) Measures leakage reactance and rotor resistance.
CUR. LOOP TUNE (2906) Preset Value: 0
mode.
No (0) No action.
Yes (1) Tunes the current controller loop.
FLUX CUR. TUNE (2907) Preset Value: 0
mode.
No (0) No action.
Yes (1) Tunes the flux controller loop. This is a rotational test.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
PROFILE NUMBER OF CYCLES (3001) Preset Value: 0
RUN Range: 0 - 255
Sets the number of cycles that the profile will automatically run before
stopping.
PR RESTART MODE (3002) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Restart (0) If interrupted, profile will start from the first step.
Continue (1) If interrupted, profile will start from current step.
Sets the restart mode if Profile Run is interrupted.
SPEED CURVE 1 (3003) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 3
FWD-Group1 (0) FWD-ACC/DEC Group1
REV-Group1 (1) REV-ACC/DEC Group1
FWD-Group2 (2) FWD-ACC/DEC Group2
REV-Group2 (3) REV-ACC/DEC Group2
Speed for curve is set by the value of the correlating Preset Speed.
PROFILE TIME 1 (3004) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0 - 65535.00 seconds
Sets the amount of time Profile Run stays at a preset speed. Time starts when
speed is within the At Speed Band P1506. ACC/DEC times are not included. A
setting of zero causes an immediate transition to the next speed segment after
the current segment is within the speed band. (See also 1506.)
PULSE MASTER PPR (3101) Preset Value: 1024
FOLLOWER Range: 50 - 20000 counts
The number of encoder pulses per revolution of the master encoder. (See also
MN755.)
INPUT VOLTS (3102) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
5V (0) Encoder operating voltage is 5V.
12V (1) Encoder operating voltage is 12V.
INPUT TYPE (3103) Preset Value: 1
Range: 0 - 2
None (0) No encoder input signal to the EXBHH007 expansion board.
Quadrature (1) Quadrature encoder input signal to the EXBHH007 expansion board.
Speed (2) Speed encoder input signal to the EXBHH007 expansion board.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
PULSE TRACK MODE (3104) Preset Value: 0
FOLLOWER Range: 0
(Continued)
Increment/Decrement changes the Rx Ratio Output by the value of the
increment step parameter on the fly, and follows the velocity of the master (no
Velocity Following (0)
position loop). The present position gain parameter disabled (internally set to
0).
Note that Position Following and Position Sync modes are not applicable.
INCREMENT STEP (3105) Preset Value: 1
Range: 1 - 1024
Output portion of the selected I:O ratio or absolute position is changed by this.
RX RATIO INPUT (3106) Preset Value: 1024
Range: 1 - 1048576
Receive Input Ratio or the received counts input divisor.
RX RATIO OUT 1 (3107) Preset Value: 1024
Range: 1 - 1048576
Received counts output multiplier.
OUTPUT TYPE (3111) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 1
Quadrature (0) Quadrature encoder output signal from the EXBHH007 expansion board.
Speed (1) Speed encoder output signal from the EXBHH007 expansion board.
TX RATIO INPUT (3112) Preset Value: 1:1024
Range: 1 - 1048576
Retransmitted input count ratio or retransmitted input counts divisor.
TX RATIO OUTPUT (3113) Preset Value: 1024
Range: 1 - 20000
Retransmitted output count ratio or retransmitted output counts output
multiplier.
MPR/F Expansion Board VS1 Control

From Master Scale Scale Rx Out
Encoder Rx Rx Position
Processor
Rx Ratio Input
Rx Ratio Output
Tx Ratio Input
Scale
Tx Ratio Output Tx
Buffered Encoder Scale
Output Tx
Example: Master Encoder=1024, Buffered Encoder Output = 1024 (Desired)

Rx Ratio In=1024, Rx Ratio Out = 2048 Rx Out to H2 Control = 2048 Tx Ratio
In = 2048, Tx Ratio Out = 1024 Buffered Encoder Output = 1024
SAVE RX OUT RATI (3114) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 – 1
No (0) Does not save values to non-volatile memory.
Yes (1) Saves values to non-volatile memory.
Determines whether or not receive output ratios are saved to non-volatile
memory so that they are retained upon loss of drive power.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
CUSTOM MAX DEC PLACES (3201) Preset Value: 1
UNITS Range: 0 - 5
0 Zero decimal places for the Custom Units display.
1 One decimal place for the Custom Units display.
2 Two decimal places for the Custom Units display.
3 Three decimal places for the Custom Units display.
4 Four decimal places for the Custom Units display.
5 Five decimal places for the Custom Units display.
The number of decimal places for the Custom Units display.
VALUE AT SPEED (3202) Preset Value: 0.0: 0
Range: 0.0 - 9999999.0 (X.X: YRPM)
Sets the desired output rate per RPM of motor speed for the Custom Units
display. This parameter provides scaling. Normal status display used until “y”
is set to a non-zero value. The value “X.X” is displayed at “Y” RPM. Note that
“Y” RPM is programmed in parameter P3204 when using Mint WorkBench.
UNITS OF MEASURE (3203) Preset Value: Cust
Range: ASCII & Graphic Characters
Allows user specified units of measure to be displayed for the Custom
Units display. Characters are selected from display using  and  keys.
More characters are available (press MORE “F1” on keypad) for additional
characters.
PLC MODE PLC LOCK (3400) Preset Value: 0
Range 0 - 1
Contents of PLC parameters P3401 through P3430 are viewable. If security is
Off (0) Off or the access code is entered, then the contents of these parameters are
also changeable.
Contents of PLC parameters P3401 through P3430 are hidden from user by
displaying 0.0.0.0 for each of these parameters.
On (1) This parameter is used to protect OEM/System Integrator programming that
has been developed for the PLC operating mode. Set this parameter to 1-On
to protect the code.
This parameter is only accessible by using Mint WorkBench. It cannot be
viewed or changed from the keypad.
Note: Transitioning this parameter from 1-On to 0-Off resets each of the
parameters P3401 through P3430 to their factory default thus clearing the
programming.
PLC CONFIG 1 through Preset Value: 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 30 Range: 0 to 255.255.255.255
(3401 - 3430)
30 PLC statements that define the 32 bit word format and structure as:
Parameter Number Format = DDD.CCC.BBB.AAA Example: P3401 = 051.000.000.020
Where:
DDD = bits 31-24 Byte 3 051 = Digital Input 1 (see Chapter 10)
CCC = bits 23-16 Byte 2 000 = OR (see Chapter 10)
BBB = bits 15-8 Byte 1 000 = False (see Chapter 10)
AAA = bits 7-0 Byte 0 020 = Forward (see Chapter 10)
Parameter No. Hex Byte 3 Hex Byte 2 Hex Byte 1 Hex Byte 0
PS3401 - 3430 Condition ID Logical Operator ID Condition ID Action ID

MSD LSD
(see Chapter 10) (see Chapter 10) (see Chapter 10) (see Chapter 10)
See also Chapter 10.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
PLC MODE COMPARE A PARAM (3431) Preset Value: 0
(Continued) COMPARE B PARAM (3433) Preset Value: 0
Range: 00000 to 10000
Comparator parameters provide a way to monitor real-time signals within the
drive and apply them to the PLC Mode’s logic. The setting of this parameter
is the number of the parameter to be monitored by the comparator. They may
be used on the condition definition side of the PLC Mode’s logic. (See Chapter
10).
COMPARE A CNST1 (3432) Preset Value: 0.00
COMPARE B CNST1 (3434) Preset Value: 0.00
COMPARE A CNST2 (3435) Preset Value: 0.00
COMPARE B CNST2 (3436) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0.00 to 100.00%
See Chapter 10.
TIMER A DURATION (3440) Preset Value: 0.00
TIMER B DURATION (3441) Preset Value: 0.00
TIMER C DURATION (3442) Preset Value: 0.00
TIMER D DURATION (3443) Preset Value: 0.00
Range: 0.00 to 999999.00 seconds
See Chapter 10.
COMP REF PARAM A NUMBER (3501) Preset Value: 0
PARAM B NUMBER (3503) Preset Value: 0
Range: 00000 to 10000
Holds number to the second parameter used in the reference. See Chapter 11.
PARAM A FUNCTION (3502) Preset Value: 0
PARAM B FUNCTION (3504) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 9
Zero (0)
Identity (1)
Absolute Value (2)
Invert (3)
Square (4)
Square Root (5)
Sine (6)
Cosine (7)
Ramp Generator (8)
Freq Generator (9)
Mathematical function applied to the first (A) and second (B) parameter. See
Chapter 11.
OPERATOR (3505) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 5
Sum (0)
Difference (1)
Multiply (2)
Divide (3)
Maximum (4)
Minimum (5)
The mathematical operator applied to the first and second parameters. See
Chapter 11.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
COMP REF FUNCTION (3506) Preset Value: 1
Zero (0)
Identity (1)
Absolute Value (2)
Invert (3)
Square (4)
Square Root (5)
Sine (6)
Cosine (7)
Ramp Generator (8)
Freq Generator (9)
Mathematical function applied after the operator. See Chapter 11.
PARAM A GAIN (3507) Preset Value: 1.00
PARAM B GAIN (3508) Preset Value: 1.00
Range: -1000.000 to 1000.000
Provides numerical scaling for parameter A and B. See Chapter 11.
RTC RTC ACTION 1 (3601) Preset Value: 0
FEATURES RTC ACTION 2 (3602) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 23
None (0)
D.Out1 On (1)
D.Out1 Off (2)
D.Out2 On (3)
D.Out2 Off (4)
R.Out1 On (5)
R.Out1 Off (6)
R.Out2 On (7)
R.Out2Off (8)
Increment (9)
Decrement (10)
Reset (11)
D.Out1 On/IncP107 (12)
D.Out1 Off/IncP107 (13)
D.Out1 On/DecP107 (14)
D.Out1 Off/DecP107 (15)
D.Out1 On/Reset (16)
D.Out1 Off/Reset (17)
R.Out1 On/IncP107 (18)
R.Out1 Off/IncP107 (19)
R.Out1 On/DecP107 (20)
R.Out1 Off/DecP107 (21)
R.Out1 On/Reset (22)
R.Out1 Off/Reset (23)
First action taken as a result of an edge from the RTC. See Chapter 12.
Second action taken as a result of an edge from the RTC. See Chapter 12.

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
RTC RTC MESSAGE 1 (3603) Preset Value: 0
FEATURES RTC MESSAGE 2 (3604) Preset Value: 0
None (0)
Clean Filter (1)
Change Filter (2)
Apply Oil/Lube (3)
Lube Mtr. Brngs (4)
Service Drive (5)
Service Coolant (6)
Service Heating (7)
RTC Alarm (8)
First message sent as a result of an edge from the RTC. See Chapter 12.
Second message sent as a result of an edge from the RTC. See Chapter 12.
ACT1 QUALIFIER (3605) Preset Value: 0
ACT2 QUALIFIER (3606) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 6
Once (0)
Second (1)
Minute (2)
Hourly (3)
Daily (4)
Monthly (5)
Yearly (6)
Schedule qualifier for the RTC action 1. See Chapter 12.
Schedule qualifier for the RTC action 2. See Chapter 12.
MSG1 QUALIFIER (3607) Preset Value: 0
MSG2 QUALIFIER (3608) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 6
Once (0)
Second (1)
Minute (2)
Hourly (3)
Daily (4)
Monthly (5)
Yearly (6)
Schedule qualifier for the RTC message 1. See Chapter 12.
ACT1 DATE/TIME (3609) Preset Value: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00
ACT 2 DATE/TIME (3610) Preset Value: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00
Range: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 31 December 2063, 23:59:59

Parameter (Number)
Selection (Value)
RTC MSG1 DATE/TIME (3611) Preset Value: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00
FEATURES MSG 2 DATE/TIME (3612) Preset Value: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00
(Continued) Range: 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 31 December 2063, 23:59:59
Date and Time for RTC message 1. See Chapter 12.
Date and Time for RTC message 2. See Chapter 12.
RTC COUNTER MAX (3630) Preset Value: 0
Range: 00000 - 99999
See Chapter 12.
DST SELECT (3631) Preset Value: 0
Range: 0 - 2
Off (0) Daylight Saving Time select. DST not used.
U.S.A (1) Daylight Saving Time select. DST for U.S.A.
E.U. (2) Daylight Saving Time select. DST for E.U.
See Chapter 12.

Chapter 8
Customizing for Your Application
Manually Tuning the Control
In some applications the drive cannot be accurately auto tuned. In these cases, it is necessary to calculate the values
needed to tune the drive and manually enter these calculated parameter values. In case the autotune feature cannot be
used, enter the motor rated and magnetizing current parameters as described below and execute “Calc Motor Model”. Use
the current proportional, current integral and speed gains calculated after this step as the starting point for manual fine-
tuning.
Motor Mag Amps Parameter

This parameter is located in the Level 2, Motor Data Block. This parameter is normally entered using the nameplate data
(motor no load amps) or auto tuned. If no other data is available, set Motor Mag Amps parameter to about 40% of the motor
rated current stated on the nameplate.
The following procedure should be used for setting the Motor Mag Amps parameter with the motor coupled to the load:
1. Adjust the Motor Mag Amps parameter to 40% of the motor nameplate full load current rating.
2. Give the controller a speed command input of 80% of the Base Speed on motor nameplate.
3. Observe the Motor Rated Volt parameter on the keypad Diagnostic display. Ideally, it should be 80% of motor nameplate
voltage. By raising the Motor Mag Amps parameter value, the motor voltage will increase proportionally. By reducing the
Motor Mag Amps parameter value, the motor voltage will decrease proportionally.
4. While the motor is running, adjust the Motor Mag Amps parameter until the display indicates the proper voltage (80% of
motor rated).
Electrical Slip Frequency Parameter

This parameter is located in the Level 2, Motor Data Block. The slip frequency may be calculated from nameplate data or
auto tuned.
Fslip = Rated Freq – [ (Rated RPM x Number of Motor Poles) / 120 ]
Current Prop Gain Parameter

This parameter is located in the Level 1, Motor Control Block. The value is set at the factory and is recommended to be
changed with Auto Tune or “Calc Motor Model”. Do not attempt to change the value manually.
Current Int Gain Parameter

The Current Int Gain parameter located in the Level 1 Motor Control Block is factory set and is suitable for most
applications.
Speed Prop Gain Parameter

The Speed Prop Gain parameter located in the Level 1 Motor Control Block is factory set to 5. This gain may be increased
or decreased to suit the application. Increasing the Speed Prop Gain parameter will result in faster response, excessive
proportional gain will cause overshoot and ringing. Decreasing the Speed Prop Gain parameter will cause slower response
and decrease overshoot, ringing, and possibly instability resulting in overcurrent faults.
Speed Int Gain Parameter

The Speed Int Gain parameter in the Level 1 Motor Control Block is set to 10 Hz and may be set at any value. See also, PI
Controller later in this section. Setting the Speed Int Gain parameter to 0Hz removes integral compensation that results in a
proportional rate loop. This selection is for systems where overshoot must be avoided and stiffness (ability of the controller
to maintain commanded speed with varying torque loads) is not required.
Increasing values of the Speed Int Gain parameter increases the stiffness of the controller. Typical setting is 10 Hz. If the
Speed Prop Gain parameter and the Speed Int Gain parameter are set too high, an overshoot condition can occur.
To manually tune the control, the following procedure is used with the load coupled to the motor:
1. Set the speed Integral Gain parameter = 0 (remove integral gain).
2. Increase the Speed Prop Gain parameter setting until adequate response to step speed commands is attained.
3. Increase the Speed Integral Gain parameter setting to increase the stiffness of the drive. Note: It is convenient to monitor
speed step response with a strip chart recorder or storage oscilloscope connected to J1A-6 or -7 with Level 1, Output
Block Analog Out #1 or #2 set to ABS SPEED, 0 VDC = zero speed. See Chapter 5 for a discussion of analog outputs.
Additionally, the scope function within Mint WorkBench is a good tool to use while tuning the drive speed loop.
PI Controller
Both the current and rate control loops are of the Proportional plus Integral type. If “E” is defined to be the error signal,
E = Command - Feedback
then the PI controller operated on “E” as
Output = (Kp * E) + (Ki ∫ E dt)
where Kp is the proportional gain of the system and Ki is the integral gain of the system.
The transfer function (output /E) of the controller using 1/s (Laplace Operator) to denote the integral,
Output/E = Kp + Ki / s = Kp (s + Ki/Kp) /s.
The second equation shows that the ratio of Ki/Kp is a frequency in radians/sec. In the Baldor AC Vector Control, the integral
gain has been redefined to be,
KI = (Ki / Kp) / (2π) Hz,
and the transfer function is,
Output/E = Kp (s + 2πKI) / s.
The integral gain is a frequency (in Hz) and should be set to about 1/10 of the bandwidth of the control loop.
The proportional gain sets the open loop gain of the system, the bandwidth (speed of response) of the system.
If the system electrical noise is excessive, the most likely cause is that the proportional gain is set too high.
MN764 Customizing for Your Application 8-1

8-2 Customizing for Your Application MN764
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
The VS1SP continuously monitors its status and operation. When a fault occurs, the event and drive status is captured to
help you troubleshoot problems. The following are designed to help in troubleshooting:
• LEDs on the keypad indicate status (Stop, FWD, REV, Jog)
• Fault Codes displayed on the keypad display as they occur
• A log of these faults and the time each occurred is kept in the Event Log
• A trace log for each event stored in the Event log
9.1 Event Log

From the Menu display screen, select Event Log and press enter. If an error is displayed during operation, press the “Help”
key to learn more about the error. If more than one error was logged, access the Event Log and examine each error Entry at
the time of the event to learn more about the error.

Status Display After power up the display shows FWD LOCAL
STATUS
the Status screen.
159.5V 600RPM
6.2A 20.00HZ
DIAG 600r MAIN
STATUS
the “EVENT LOG” selection.
BASIC PARAMS
ADVANCED PROG
EVENT LOG Press Enter to view the event log.
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAG BACK
Event Log Display Displays error name, EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press or to view next entry.
Entry # and time the
error occurred. Press F2 to display Trace menu.
LOW INITIAL BUS
LOW INITIAL BUS 0 4-Jul-06 09:35:00 Press F1 to return to Status menu.
0 Date Time
DD/MM/YY STATUS TRACE

Entry # HH:MM:SS
0-9
Trace
Trace is used to display control conditions present at the time the fault occurred. Input states, Output states, various voltage
and current values etc. can be viewed to help understand the cause of the fault condition. Each event in the Event log has
its own Fault Trace displays that were captured when that event occurred. Scroll through the event log to the event you wish
to investigate.
Trace Displays

Event Log Display Press or to scroll to the EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press F2 (or press Enter) to show
event you want to investigate. the fault Trace for the event.
LOW INITIAL BUS
3 4-Jul-06 09:42:00
STATUS TRACE
Fault Trace Display The Fault Latch word is displayed. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
0x=Hexadecimal This is a hex value.
0b=Binary FAULT LATCH
0x0000 The T0003 indicates the Fault
Trace for event 3 of the event log
STATUS T0003 BACK is displayed.
MN764 Troubleshooting 9-1

FAULT LATCH Word Interpretation
Hexadecimal Binary Description
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Fault
0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 Motor Phase U upper Transistor
0002 0000 0000 0000 0010 Motor Phase U lower Transistor
0004 0000 0000 0000 0100 Motor Phase V lower Transistor
0008 0000 0000 0000 1000 Motor Phase V upper Transistor
0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 Motor Phase W lower Transistor
0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 Motor Phase W upper Transistor
0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 Brake Desaturation Fault
0080 0000 0000 1000 0000 Brake IGBT Fault
0100 0000 0001 0000 0000 Not Used
0200 0000 0010 0000 0000 Not Used
0400 0000 0100 0000 0000 Ground Fault
0800 0000 1000 0000 0000 Over Current Fault (Active Low)
1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 Pulse by Pulse fault on Motor Phase 1
8000 1000 0000 0000 0000 Inverter Desaturation Fault
Trace Displays Continued

Fault Trace Display The Alarm Latch word is also FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
displayed. The T0003 indicates
the Fault Trace for event 3 of the
event log is displayed. ALARMLATCH
0x0000 This is a hex value.
STATUS T0003 BACK
ALARM LATCH Word Interpretation

Hexadecimal Binary Description
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Alarm
0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 Fan Alarm
0002 0000 0000 0000 0010 Motor Over Temperature
0004 0000 0000 0000 0100 Phase Loss
0008 0000 0000 0000 1000 Line Loss
0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 Line Sag
0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 Power Supply Alarm
0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 Not Used
0080 0000 0000 1000 0000 Powerbase in pulse-by-pulse limiting
0100 0000 0001 0000 0000 Not Used
0200 0000 0010 0000 0000 Not Used
0400 0000 0100 0000 0000 Not Used
0800 0000 1000 0000 0000 Not Used
1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
4000 0100 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
8000 1000 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
9-2 Troubleshooting MN764


Fault Trace Display Third word in the event trace is FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
the V oltage reference for the
Analog to Digital Converter.
ADC CURRENT REF
1.501 V
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the Voltage measurement FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
of the Internal 24V power supply
for the Opto Inputs and Outputs.
24 V REF
25.7 V
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the status of the nine FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
Digital Input signals.
J2 8 (Enable) left most digit=1.
J2 16 (DIN#8) right most digit=0. USER INPUTS This is a bit display, not a hex
100000000 value.
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the status of the Digital FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry .
EV. LOG
Output signals. The below table
indicates the function of each of the
DIGITAL OUTPUTS This is a bit display , not a hex
8 bits.
00010010 value.
STATUS T0003 BACK
Digital Output Display

Description
Hexadecimal Binary
00 0000 0000 No Fault
01 0000 0001 Actual Speed is less than Zero Speed Band
02 0000 0010 Main SCR enable (active low)
04 0000 0100 Dynamic Brake active
08 0000 1000 Soft start (pre-charge) relay active
10 0001 0000 Relay Output 2 (J3-28, 29, 30) active
20 0010 0000 Relay Output 1 (J3-25, 26, 27) active
40 0100 0000 Digital Output 2 (J2-19, 20) active
80 1000 0000 Digital Output 1 (J2-17, 18) active


Fault Trace Display Next is the voltage present at FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
Analog Input 1.
ANA INPUT 1
0.0 V
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the voltage present at FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
Analog Input 2.
ANA INPUT 2
0.0 V
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the Speed Reference FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
Setting.
SPEED REF
60.00 Hz
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the AC output current on FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
phase 1.
PH1 CURRENT
0.0 A
STATUS T0003 BACK
EV. LOG
phase 2.
PH2 CURRENT
0.0 A
STATUS T0003 BACK
EV. LOG
phase 3.
PH3 CURRENT
0.0 A
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Current. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
MOTOR CURRENT
0.0A
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Torque. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
MOTOR TORQUE
0.0 NM
STATUS T0003 BACK


Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Voltage. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG Display
MOTOR VOLTS
0.0V
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Speed. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
MOTOR SPEED
0 RPM
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Next is Bus Voltage. Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG FAULT TRACE
BUS VOLTAGE
0.0 V
Fault Trace Display The control heatsink temperature. Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG FAULT TRACE
DRIVE TEMP
27.3°C
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display The fault code for the event. FAULT TRACE Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG
FAULT LATCH
0x0000
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display The alarm code for the event. Press or to view next entry.
EV. LOG FAULT TRACE
ALARM LATCH
0x0000
STATUS T0003 BACK
Fault Trace Display Press Enter or F2 to return to the

EV. LOG
event log.
END OF
FAULT TRACE
STATUS BACK

9.2 Diagnostic Information
After power up, select the Diagnostic Menu to see information from the diagnostic displays.

STATUS the “DIAGNOSTICS” selection.
BASIC PARAMS
ADVANCED PROG Press Enter to view diagnostic
EVENT LOG information.
DIAGNOSTICS
STATUS BACK
Press to display next Displays active operating mode DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. settings. OPERATING MODE
Keypad
Speed
V/F Control
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Bit display of digital inputs, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. outputs and the voltage present at previous Diagnostic screen.
the internal 24V supply terminals. DIGITAL I/O
Note: Example display shows that INPUTS 100000000 Press F2 to return to previous
the drive enable terminal OUTPUTS 0001 menu.
(J2-8) is on and that USER 24V 24.9V
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Relay Out 2 is on.
Press to display next STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
PROC CONTROL PID Press F2 to return to previous
Output Frequency, % Feedforward 0.00HZ 0.0FF menu.
% Setpoint, % Feedback 0.0SP 0.0FB Note: This screen does not appear
unless P#1401 is set to Process Control.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Diagnostic Display Displays software version, hp, STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
volts and Amp/Volt ratings. previous Diagnostic screen.
IHH-1.22
RATED HP 3HP Press F2 to return to previous
RATED VOLTS 240.0V menu.
RATED A/V 4.0A/V
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

DIAG
IHH-1.22
RATED CURRENT 9.6A Press F2 to return to previous
RATED PK CU 16.8A menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

group. Displays: DIAG
previous Diagnostic screen.
POWER BASE VERSION
Power Base ID number ID 0x000A2003 Press F2 to return to previous
EE Firmware version EE VER 0x00000001 menu.
FPGA firmware version FPGA VER 0x00000A02
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN 0x=Hexadecimal
0b=Binary
Press to display next Displays real time clock values STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
DIAG
group. (date and time) and total run time previous Diagnostic screen.
REAL TIME CLOCK
since installation.
Jan 1, 2009 Press F2 to return to previous
Press ENTER to set date and 22:07:35 menu.
time. RUN TIMER 474.1HR
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Diagnostic Information Continued

Press to display next Displays energy cost (based on DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. parameter #2305 value). ENERGY previous Diagnostic screen.
EST POWER 0.00KW Press F2 to return to previous
EST ENERGY 0.0KWH menu.
EST COST 0.0$
Press to display next Diagnostic Analog Input values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG INPUTS
ANA IN1 1.3v Press F2 to return to previous
ANA IN2 0.0v menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Diagnostic Analog Output values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press or to go to the next or
group. display . previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANA OUT1 0.0V Press F2 to return to previous
ANA OUT2 0.0V menu.
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Diagnostic installed Option Card Press or to go to the next or
DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. identification display. previous Diagnostic screen.
OPTION BOARDS
OPTION 1 ETHERNET Press F2 to return to previous
OPTION 2 NONE menu.
FEEDBACK NONE
Press to display next Displays keypad software version. DIAG STOP LOCAL
group.
KEYPAD VERSION
KEYPAD SOF 1.1X
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN
Press to display next Displays Composite Reference DIAG STOP LOCAL

group. values. COMPOSITE REF
COMPONENT A 0.00%
COMPONENT B 0.00%
REFERENCE 0.00%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

DRIVE
DC Bus Voltage BUS VOLTAGE 333.9V Press F2 to return to previous
Drive Heatsink Temperature DRIVE TEMP 26.1C menu.
% Drive Overload (remaining) DRIVE O/L L 100.0%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

MOTOR
Motor Voltage MOTOR VOLTAGE 333.9V Press F2 to return to previous
Motor Current MOTOR CURR 4.8A menu.
% Motor Overload (remaining) MOTOR O/L L 100.0%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

9.3 Fault Messages
Table 9-1 Fault Messages (Alphabetical by Keypad Text)
Fault
Keypad Text Type Description
Number
AC Input High Fault 69 Check AC Input Line Voltage.
ADC Calibration Voltages Out of Range. Check analog input wiring for noise. If
ADC Calibr Fault Fault 57
problem persists, contact factory for further assistance.
Apply Oil/Lub Alarm 84 Triggered from RTC Module.
Incorrect setup. Filter Source should be set to "Raw Speed" when destination
Aux Filter Setup Alarm 51
is set to SpeedLoop.
Dynamic brake has overheated, check sizing or increase ohms setting for
Brake Over Temp Alarm 97
brake.
Dynamic brake de-saturation has occurred. Check that dynamic brake resistor
Brk Desat Fault 65
is properly connected to R1 and R2.
Transient causing unbalanced bus capacitor voltage; cycle power to reset
Bus Transient Fault 95 fault. A line surge or bus capacitor failure has resulted in an unbalanced
voltage condition as determined by a bus voltage monitoring circuit.
Change Filter(s) Alarm 83 Triggered from RTC Module.
Clean Filter(s) Alarm 82 Triggered from RTC Module.
Some drive feature or option has failed initial startup tests; parameter(s) out of
Configuration Fault 2
range after download of improper parameter file settings.
Control EE Fault 27 Problem reading EEPROM on the control board, contact Baldor for service.
Control EE Fault 29 Problem writing fault log to control board EEPROM, contact Baldor for service.
Problem writing the header record to the control board EEPROM, contact
Control EE Fault 31
Baldor for service.
Problem writing a parameter to the control board EEPROM, contact Baldor for
Control EE Fault 32
service.
Converter has overheated, decrease loading; check for proper air flow; check
Conv Over Temp Alarm 98
for elevated ambient temperature.
Current Ref Fault 15 Reference volt for current readings out of tolerance, contact Baldor for service.
Motor current sensor(s) out of tolerance; cycle power to drive; if problem
Current Sense Fault 12
persists contact factory.
DC Bus V over 405/810/1000V for 230V/460V/575V units. Check for high input
DC Bus High Fault 19
line voltage; increase decel rates; check for correct brake resistor on R1/R2.
DC Bus V below 220/440/550V for 230V/460V/575V units. Check for low input
DC Bus Low Alarm 20 line voltage; increase accel rate; verify B+ to B- voltage; verify proper brake
resistor.
Bus peak voltage rating exceeded. Check AC input lines; sizing of dynamic
DC Pk Overvolt Fault 63 brake; insure that input does not have power factor correction capacitors or
other source of transients.
Output current exceeds desaturation limit. Check motor and connections for
Desaturation Fault 7 short circuit; verify proper motor load; increase acc/dec; check for conductive
debris inside drive.
Parameter download from keypad or network has failed. Verify parameter set
Download Fault 54
compatibility.
Drive Disabled Alarm 66 Motion command given with drive disabled. Check drive enable input.
Drive enabled during parameter download. Drive must remain disabled until
Drive Enabled Alarm 67
completion of parameter download.
Heat sink Temperature is lower than allowed. Space heater may be required in
Drive Low Temp Fault 76
cabinet.
Heatsink temp exceeded 85/950 C. Verify ambient does not exceed 45°C.
Drive Over Tmp Alarm 21
Clean fans and heatsink. Add cabinet cooling if ambient is too high.

Table 9-1 Fault Messages (Continued)
Fault
Number
Dynamic braking current limit exceeded. Check for shorted braking resistor
Dyn Brake Desat Fault 36 circuit or for brake resistor with an ohmic value below the allowed limit for the
drive. Check for a short between R1 or R2 and B-.
Excess Faults/Hr Alarm 79 The allowed number of faults/hour has been exceeded.
J1-16 is open. Check remote connection on J1-16. Occurs only when external
External Trip Fault 22
fault parameter is turned ON.
Fan circuit is seeing low current or over current. Verify that fan is not blocked
Fan Loss Alarm 62
and is connected properly.
Problem reading fault log from control board EEPROM, contact Baldor for
Flt Log Mem Fail Fault 28
service.
Speed error beyond Set Speed Band parameter. Verify motor is not
Following Error Fault 18
overloaded; increase Set Speed Band.
Ground currents in output of control. Due to shorts to ground or excessive
leakage current to ground. Disconnect motor, meg motor for insulation leakage
Ground Fault Fault 8 to ground; check motor leads for shorts to ground; replace motor leads with
lower capacitance cable or shorten leads if possible; consider the usage of
load reactor.
High Line Alarm 102 Power grid voltage too high, check power base rating, check input lines.
IGBT Thermal Fault 94 IGBT thermal overload. Check motor loading. Allow time to cool.
Internal Config Fault 35 An internal firmware configuration occurred, contact Baldor for service.
Line Loss Alarm 37 All 3 input phases lost. Check input circuit breaker, fuses or input contacts.
Line Regen Fault 34 This fault code is not used, if it occurs contact Baldor for service.
All 3 phase input lines have sagged below 70% of nominal. Check input line
Line Sag Alarm 64
quality; check line impedance; check for excessive loading on power system.
Internal logic power supply has dropped below 24V threshold. Replace Power
Logic Supply Fault 9
Supply.
Bus volt below 200/400/500V on 230/460/575V units at power up. Check input
Low Initial Bus Fault 11 line voltage; check for proper resistor on R1/R2; check for open circuit on
TH1-TH2 Terminals.
Power grid voltage too low. Check power base rating; check input
Low Line Alarm 101
connections; ensure input voltage is within drive specification.
Transistor #1 failed to fire or misfired. Verify IGBT is not shorted. Verify no
Lower U Gate Fault 40 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify
motor windings are not shorted.
Lower V Gate Fault 42 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify
Lower W Gate Fault 44 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify
Macro Cmd Failed Fault 93 Macro command execution failure. Verify that macro file is correct.
Macro Cmd Inval Fault 92 Macro command found is invalid. Verify that macro file is correct.
Macro Read Fault 90 Macro record read failed. Recompile file and download to drive again.
Macro Rec Length Fault 91 Macro record length is invalid. Recompile file and download to drive again.
Memory Fault 49 Option card problem, memory failure, contact Baldor for service.
Motor thermal connection at TH1-TH2 open circuit. Motor overheated due to
Motor Overload Fault 23
excess load; Ohm connections at TH1-TH2.
Motor Overload Fault 80 Motor overloaded. Check motor load. Verify motor rated amps parameter.
Motor has overheated. Check motor cooling system or blocked air flow; check
Motor Ovrtmp Alarm 61
thermal switch on TH1-TH2 circuit; reduce load on motor.
Forced network fault. Loss of network communications; watchdog timer
Network Timeout Fault 48
expired; user program timing problems.

Fault
Number
Control board detected new or a different power base. Press RESET to
New Base ID Fault 5 clear. Factory settings will be restored. Verify all settings and setup custom
parameters.
No Fault Fault 0 No Fault Exists.
Problem writing a parameter to the control board EEPROM, contact Baldor for
NV memory Fail Fault 30
service.
Invalid protocol selected for optional communication card 1. Select a protocol
Opt1 Protocol Alarm 77 supported by the expansion board that is installed or replace board with a
board that supports the desired protocol.
Invalid protocol selected for optional communication card 2. Select a protocol
Opt2 Protocol Alarm 78 supported by the expansion board that is installed or replace board with a
board that supports the desired protocol.
Option board not recognized or is not supported. Verify proper firmware
Option Board Fault 50 version is being used. Download latest firmware from www.baldor.com and
install in drive.
Option Board for the feature requested is not installed. Verify slot location for
Option Not Found Alarm 74 expansion board to support desired feature; install appropriate option board
for requested feature.
Motor current exceeded peak limit. Check motor connections and motor
Over Current Fault 6 load; increase acc/dec times; verify correct motor data settings; verify proper
tuning.
Rotor speed over 110% maximum speed limit. Verify proper drive tuning;
Over Speed Fault 59 ensure drive is not being overhauled by excessive high-speed regenerative
load.
Motor current exceeded 150% for 1 minute. Check motor load. Extend acc/
Overload - 1 Min Fault 16
dec times. Verify proper motor data and drive tuning.
Motor current exceeded 175% for 3 seconds. Check motor load and resize
motor and drive as needed. Extend acc/dec times. Verify proper motor
Overload - 3 Sec Fault 17 data and drive tuning. Change setting of "Overload" parameter (P2206) to
"Foldback" to allow current to automatically limit to a lower level prior to the 3
second time limit.
Param Checksum Fault 4 Cycle power. If no change, load Factory Settings.
Parameter Fault 55 Parameters momentarily locked. Wait 30 seconds, try again.
PB Power Supply Alarm 68 Power Base Logic Power Supply below acceptable operating levels.
Powerbase signal interface PCB board is over heating, reduce loading or
PCB Over Temp Alarm 96
contact Baldor for service.
Pulse Follower Option Board Setup. Check Master PPR, Receive, Transmit
PF Setup Alarm 73
Ratio and Input Type.
Ph1 (L1) Loss Alarm 109 Loss of phase 1 (L1), check power grid or wiring connections.
Phase 1 current limiting via pulse by pulse method; check motor spiking loads,
Ph1 Pulse Fault 45
chattering contacts, loose connections.
Ph2 Pulse Fault 46
Ph3 Pulse Fault 47
Single input phase lost. Check input circuit breaker, fuses or input contacts.
Phase Loss Alarm 38
Excessive line notching occurring.
PLC Mode Trip. PLC action has generated this trip. Check input defined in
PLC Mode Trip Fault 81
PLC mode for fault trip. Check PLC program logic.
Should occur in conjunction with other faults to indicate that fault was
Power Base Fault 10 generated by the power base circuitry. This is useful in trouble-shooting to
understand that the fault was detected by the power base electronics.

Fault
Number
Communication error between control board and power base memory. Cycle
Powerbase EE Fault 26
power. If problem persists, contact factory for assistance.
Power base communication loss or incompatible firmware. Cycle power. If
Powerbase FPGA Fault 52
problem persists, contact factory.
Dynamic Brake miswired; AC Input too low; input impedance too high (soft
Pre-charge Fault Fault 60 line); Bus Caps shorted or Input Single Phasing. Check motor thermal lead
connections to TH1-TH2.
Reactor has overheated, decrease loading; decrease wire length; verify drive
Reac Over Temp Alarm 99 ambient temperature is less than 45°C; verify proper air flow and system
cooling capability.
Brake resistor power rating exceeded. Check resistor ratings; extend decel
Regen R or PWR Fault 25
times; increase size of braking kit.
RTC Alarm Alarm 89 Triggered from RTC Module.
Phase loss due to SCR1 (L1 upper) not firing. Verify SCR gate leads properly
SCR1 No Fire Alarm 103
connected.
Phase loss due to SCR2 (L1 lower) not firing. Verify SCR gate leads properly
connected.
connected.
connected.
connected.
connected.
Temperature of converter bridge detected by power interface board is too
low or too high. Verify drive ambient temperature is between -10°C and 45°C.
Sense 1 TA Alarm 100
Verify proper air flow and system cooling capability. Verify proper termination
of temperature sensors within drive.
Ser Coolant Sys Alarm 87 Triggered from RTC Module.
Ser Heating Sys Alarm 88 Triggered from RTC Module.
Service Drive Alarm 86 Triggered from RTC Module.
Service Motor Alarm 85 Triggered from RTC Module.
Soft Version Fault 33 This fault code is not used. If it occurs, contact Baldor for service.
Comms Error between control board and power board. Remove power from
SPI Timeout Fault 3 drive, verify proper grounding and bonding techniques. Re-apply power. If
persists, contact Baldor.
Failed to read current in all 3 motor phases. Check motor connections or open
Torque Proving Fault 24
motor contacts.
Detects a broken or unplugged fiber (F or F1) between the signal interface
U Fiber COM Fault 113 board and the master gate drive board for the U-Phase. If the signal is off for
more than 5 mS, the fault will occur.
Unknown Fault 1 This fault should not occur. Contact Baldor for service.
Upper U Gate Fault 39 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify
Upper V Gate Fault 41 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify
Upper W Gate Fault 43 debris has fallen into drive. Check wiring between drive and motor. Verify

Fault
Number
User 24V supply out of tolerance. Measure 24V supply using a digital multi-
meter at terminals J1-23 and J1-24. If voltage is not correct, remove all
User 24V Fault 14
external control connections and repeat measurement to determine if problem
is with external connections or with the power supply.
User analog input reference out of tolerance. Check connections for proper
User Ref Fault 13 shielding and grounding; check for excessive noise on analog signals. If
problem persists, contact Baldor for service.
Detects a broken or uplugged fiber (F or F1) between the signal interface
V Fiber COM Fault 115 board and the master gate drive board for the V-Phase. If the signal is off for
Detects a broken or uplugged fiber (F or F1) between the signal interface
W Fiber COM Fault 117 board and the master gate drive board for the W-Phase. If the signal is off for

9.4 Electrical Noise Considerations
All electronic devices are vulnerable to significant electronic interference signals (commonly called “Electrical Noise”). At the
lowest level, noise can cause intermittent operating errors or faults. From a circuit standpoint, 5 or 10 millivolts of noise may
cause detrimental operation. For example, analog speed and torque inputs are often scaled at 5 to 10VDC maximum with a
typical resolution of one part in 1,000. Thus, noise of only 5 mV represents a substantial error.
At the extreme level, significant noise can cause damage to the drive. Therefore, it is advisable to prevent noise generation
and to follow wiring practices that prevent noise generated by other devices from reaching sensitive circuits. In a control,
such circuits include inputs for speed, torque, control logic, and speed and position feedback, plus outputs to some
indicators and computers.
Relay and Contactor Coils

Among the most common sources of noise are the coils of contactors and relays. When these highly inductive coil circuits
are opened, transient conditions often generate spikes of several hundred volts in the control circuit. These spikes can
induce several volts of noise in an adjacent wire that runs parallel to a control-circuit wire. Figure 9-1 illustrates noise
suppression for AC and DC relay coils.
Figure 9-1 AC and DC Coil Noise Suppression
RC Snubber
0.47 μf DC Coil Diode

AC Coil
33 Ω
Wires between Controls and Motors

Output leads from a typical 460VAC drive controller contain rapid voltage rises created by power semiconductors switching
650V in less than a microsecond, 1,000 to 16,000 times a second. These noise signals can couple into sensitive drive
circuits. If shielded pair cable is used, the coupling is reduced by nearly 90%, compared to unshielded cable. Even input AC
power lines contain noise and can induce noise in adjacent wires. In some cases, line reactors may be required. To prevent
induced transient noise in signal wires, all motor leads and AC power lines should be contained in rigid metal conduit, or
flexible conduit. Do not place line conductors and load conductors in same conduit. Use one conduit for 3 phase input wires
and another conduit for the motor leads. The conduits should be grounded to form a shield to contain the electrical noise
within the conduit path. Signal wires, even ones in shielded cable, should never be placed in the conduit with motor power
wires.
Special Drive Situations

For severe noise situations, it may be necessary to reduce transient voltages in the wires to the motor by adding load
reactors. Load reactors are installed between the control and motor. Line and Load Reactors are typically 3% reactance and
are designed for the frequencies encountered in PWM drives. For maximum benefit, the reactors should be mounted in the
drive enclosure with short leads between the control and the reactors.
Control Enclosures
Motor controls mounted in a grounded enclosure should also be connected to earth ground with a separate conductor to
ensure best ground connection. Often grounding the control to the grounded metallic enclosure is not sufficient. Usually
painted surfaces and seals prevent solid metallic contact between the control and the panel enclosure. Likewise, conduit
should never be used as a ground conductor for motor power wires or signal conductors.
Special Motor Considerations

Motor frames must also be grounded. As with control enclosures, motors must be grounded directly to the control and
plant ground with as short a ground wire as possible. Capacitive coupling within the motor windings produces transient
voltages between the motor frame and ground. The severity of these voltages increases with the length of the ground wire.
Installations with the motor and control mounted on a common frame, and with heavy ground wires less than 10 ft. (3m)
long, rarely have a problem caused by these motor-generated transient voltages.
Analog Signal Wires

Analog signals generally originate from speed and torque controls, plus DC tachometers and process controllers. Reliability
is often improved by the following noise reduction techniques:
• Use twisted-pair shielded wires with the shield grounded at the drive end only.
• Route analog signal wires away from power or control wires (all other wiring types).
• Cross power and control wires at right angles (90°) to minimize inductive noise coupling.

Chapter 10
PLC Mode Description
10.1 Overview
PLC functionality is selected by setting Level 1, Input Setup block, Operating Mode parameter P#1401 to PLC. PLC mode
allows 2-Wire and 3-Wire operating modes to be created using a selection of conditions, logical operators and desired
actions. PLC Mode parameters are located in Level 3, PLC block parameters P3401 through P3443.
Simply stated, for each logical statement choose two input conditions from Table 10-1, one logical operation from Table
10-2 and one action from Table 10-3 . These 30 logical statements are evaluated every 10 milliseconds, in order from P3401
to 3430. For each statement Condition 1 and Condition 2 are evaluated to True or False, the Logical Operator is applied
and the final outcome is either True or False. If True the Action is taken; if False the Alternate Action is taken. Conditions,
operators and actions are pre-defined and so cannot be changed.
10.2 Configuration Parameters

The PLC program is contained within 30 statements, PLC CONFIG 1 (P3401) through PLC CONFIG 30 (P3430). Each
statement has the same 32 bit word format and structure as the example given in Figure 10-1. If P3401-P3430 are not
programmed, the PLC Mode will do nothing. It is also possible to program them so that the motor will not move. This can
happen, for instance, if no Forward/Reverse Enables are programmed.
Figure 10-1 Example PLC Configuration Parameters
Parameter Number Format = DDD.CCC.BBB.AAA Example: P3401 = 051.000.000.020
Where:
DDD = bits 31-24 Byte 3 051 = Digital Input 2 (from Table 10-1)
CCC = bits 23-16 Byte 2 000 = OR (from Table 10-2)
BBB = bits 15-8 Byte 1 000 = False (from Table 10-1)
AAA = bits 7-0 Byte 0 020 = Forward (from Table 10-3)
Parameter No. Hex Byte 3 Hex Byte 2 Hex Byte 1 Hex Byte 0
P3401 - 3430 Condition ID Logical Operator ID Condition ID Action ID

MSD LSD
(Table 10-1) (Table 10-2) (Table 10-1) (Table 10-3)
A configuration parameter may be disabled (turned off) by setting bit 23 in its configuration word. This is the same as
setting the most significant bit of byte 2 (the logical operator ID field). If any field within any of these parameters is invalid,
it is ignored at run time. Only one runtime version exists at a time. The runtime version in effect is the one defined by the
parameter table active at the time the drive was placed in Remote Mode.
To switch runtime PLC versions perform the following operations:
1. Disable the drive.
2. At the keypad, select “Local” mode.
3. Select the desired parameter table.
4. Enable the drive.
5. At the keypad, select “Remote” mode.
If a parameter table is switched while the drive is enabled the run time PLC version is not affected.
10.3 Comparator Function

Comparator parameters provide a way to monitor real-time signals within the drive and apply them to the PLC Mode’s logic.
They may be used on the condition definition side of the PLC Mode’s logic. Parameters P3431 and P3433 hold parameter
numbers (i.e. they point to other parameters, see Monitor and RTC chapter in this manual for these values). P3432 and
P3434 hold percents that are applied against P3431 and P3433 maximums, together they provide all that is needed for the
following comparison equations:
If |Value of P3431| ≤ (P3432/100)*(Max of P3431) then True or
If |Value of P3433| ≤ (P3434/100)*(Max of P3433) then True
In a sense P3431 and P3433 may be viewed as holding addresses for other parameters.
For example: If P3431 = 5 (selects parameter 5 which is Motor Volts = 230V) and P3432=20% then Comparator A is true if
|P5| = (20/100)*230 ≤ 46V. But if the voltage exceeds 46V, Comparator A is false.
If P3433 = 6 (selects parameter 6 Motor Current = 10 Amps) then Comparator B is true if |P6| ≤ 1 Amp. Any parameter (see
Monitor and RTC chapter in this manual for these values) can be used in a comparator.
Note: Don’t use P3431 and P3433 since this would create a circular reference and the comparator would fail.
MN764 PLC Mode Description 10-1

A and B are defined as follows:
A = (Value of Parameter P3431) / (Max of Parameter P3431)
B = (Value of Parameter P3433) / (Max of Parameter P3433)
Then, A & B are signals with the following properties: -1≤ A ≤1 and -1≤ B ≤1.
A and B are normalized signals derived from parameters pointed to by P3431 and P3433.
Comparator A
Comparator A is used in Condition 76 and checks the following relationship for true or false:
If | A - P3435/100 | ≤ P3432/100
Alternatively, another way of writing the same relation is as follows:
If (P3435 - P3432)/100 ≤ A ≤ (P3432 + P3435)/100
Thus, Comparator A provides a way to determine if a parameter is within a specific range. For example, if P3431=5 (Motor
Volts with Max=230V) and P3432=20% and P3435=0% then Comparator A would be true so long as |P5| ≤ 46V or |A| ≤ 0.20.
That is, motor voltage is monitored and so long as it remains below 46 Volts, the outcome of Comparator A would be True,
but if it were to go above 46 Volts, the output of Comparator A would be False.
Comparator B
Comparator B is used in Condition 77 and checks the following relationship for true or false:
If | B - P3436/100 | ≤ P3434/100
Alternatively, another way of writing the same relation is as follows:
If (P3436 - P3434)/100 ≤ B ≤ (P3436 + P3434)/100
Thus, Comparator B provides a way to determine if a parameter is within a specific range. For example, if P3433=6 (Motor
Current with Max=10Amps) and P3434=10% and P3436=50% then Comparator B would be true so long as: 4 Amps ≤ P6
≤ 6 Amps OR 0.4 ≤ B ≤ 0.60. That is, motor current is monitored and so long as it remains within 1 Amp of 5 Amps the
outcome of Comparator B would be True, but if it were to go above 6 Amps or below 4 Amps the output of Comparator B
would be False.
Less than
Less than, Condition 88, uses the following equation: If A<B then True else False For example, if P3431=103 (Analog Input 1
Reference with Max=100%) and P3433=104 (Analog Input 2 Reference with Max=100%) then Condition 88 would be true so
long as P103<P104 or so long as Analog Input 1 Reference is less than Analog Input 2 Reference.
Equal
Equal, Condition 89, uses the following equation: If A=B then True else False For example, if P3431=103 (Analog Input 1
Reference with Max=100%) and P3433=104 (Analog Input 2 Reference with Max=100%) then Condition 89 would be true so
long as P103=P104 or so long as Analog Input 1 Reference is equal to Analog Input 2 Reference.
Greater than
Greater than, Condition 90, uses the following equation: If A>B then True else False For example, if P3431=103 (Analog
Input 1 Reference with Max=100%) and P3433=104 (Analog Input 2 Reference with Max=100%) then
Condition 90 would be true so long as P103>P104 or so long as Analog Input 1 Reference is greater than Analog Input 2
Reference.
10.4 Timers
The PLC Mode uses four general purpose timers: Timer A (P3440), B (P3441), C (P3442) and D (P3443) with units of
seconds and resolution of 10ms or 100 counts/sec. They may be used in PLC control and logic statements as defined in
the Conditions and Actions Tables. In general there are actions to start and stop the timers as well as conditions to test their
contents.
P113, P114, P117 and P118 are read/write monitor parameters that reflect the current state of timers A through D. Since
they may be written, they can be used to start a timer by writing zero to it or to stop a timer by writing max counts.
For example, set P3440 to 1.5 sec then upon Timer A timeout,
P113 = 150 counts = (1.5 sec) x (100 counts/sec)
Starting timer A also starts P113 ramping from 0 to 150 in 1.5 seconds.
Set P3441 to 10 seconds and start Timer B, P114 then ramps from 0 to 1000 in 10 sec.
These monitor parameters may also be inputs to the Composite Reference block to generate timed ramps or other complex
reference signals.
10-2 PLC Mode Description MN764

Table 10-1 PLC Conditions
ID Description
0 False - This condition is always False
1 True - This condition is always True
2 Reserved (Workbench - Digital Input)
3 Reserved (Workbench - Hard Forward Limit)
4 Reserved (Workbench - Hard Reverse Limit)
5 Reserved (Workbench - Soft Forward Limit)
6 Reserved (Workbench - Soft Reverse Limit)
7 Reserved (Workbench - Move Statue)
8 Reserved (Workbench - Idle)
9 Reserved (Workbench - Position achieved)
10 Reserved (Workbench - At target position)
11 Reserved (Workbench - In Idle Position Window)
12 Reserved (Workbench - Following Error Fatal)
13 Reserved (Workbench - Following Error Warning)
At Speed - If the measured speed of the rotor is within the At Speed Band (P1506) of the reference then this
14
condition is True.
15 Reserved - (Workbench - Velocity Error)
Velocity Setpoint Minimum - If the measured absolute speed is below the Minimum Output Speed (P2002) then this
16
condition is True.
Velocity Setpoint Maximum- If the measured absolute speed is above the Maximum Output Speed (P2003) then this
17
is True.
18 Reserved
19 Motor Overload - If the motor's I2T algorithm has exceeded its integral limit this condition is True.
20 Drive Overload - If the drive's I2T algorithm has exceeded its integral limit this condition is True.
21 Motor Direction - If rotor speed is positive this condition is True.
22 Command Direction - If speed demand is positive this condition is True.
23 Ready - If soft start is complete, drive hardware enable is on and there are no errors this condition is True.
24 Drive On - If the drive is ready and producing PWM to the motor this condition is True.
25 Fault - If the drive is faulted for any reason this condition is True.
26 Motor Over Temp Trip - If the motor's over temperature trip input has occurred then this condition is True.
27 Drive Over Temp Trip - If the drive's over temperature trip input has occurred then this condition is True.
Drive Over Temp Warning - If the drive's temperature has exceeded that defined for the drive then this condition is
28
True.
29 Reserved (Workbench - home status)
50 Digital Input 1 (J2-9) - If digital input 1 is high this condition is true. (Level sensitive)
Digital Input 8 (J2-16) - If digital input 8 is high this condition is true. (Level sensitive). When J2-16 is used in PLC
57
Program, Set P2201=OFF to avoid an external trip condition.
58 Drive Run - If the drive is on and has a forward or reverse command this condition is True.
59 Stop - If motion status is stopped this condition is True.

Table 10-1 PLC Conditions Continued
ID Description
60 Jog - If jog mode is active this condition is True.
61 Accelerating - If absolute speed demand is accelerating this condition is True.
62 Constant Speed - If absolute speed demand is constant this condition is True.
63 Decelerating - If absolute speed demand is decelerating this condition is True.
64 At Zero Speed - If absolute speed demand is below the Zero Speed Set Point (P1505) this condition is True.
65 At Set Speed - If absolute speed demand is above Set Speed Point (P1507) this condition is True.
66 Motor Over Current - If motor RMS current is above the Overload Set Point (P1508) this condition is True.
67 Motor Under Current - If motor RMS current is below the Underload Set Point (P1509) this condition is True.
68 Keypad Control - If the drive is under keypad control this condition is True.
69 Dynamic Brake - If the drive's dynamic brake is on this condition is True.
70 Frequency Foldback - If the drive is in frequency foldback this condition is True.
71 Alarm - If an alarm is active this condition is True.
72 Forward - If the drive has a forward command this condition is True.
73 Reverse - If the drive has a reverse command this condition is True.
Process PID Error - If the absolute value of Process PID Error is less than the Process PID Error Tolerance (P2606)
74
this condition is True.
75 Sleep Mode - If the drive's sleep algorithm has put the drive to sleep this condition is True.
Comparator A - Monitors a parameter and returns True if the parameter is less than a predefined setpoint.
76
NOTE: See chapter on PLC Comparator Parameters.
Comparator B - Monitors a parameter and returns True if the parameter is below a predefined setpoint.
77
NOTE: See chapter on PLC Comparator Parameters.
78 Parameter Table 1 - If parameter table 1 is active then this condition is True.
82 Digital Output 1- If digital output 1 is On this condition is True.
83 Digital Output 2- If digital output 2 is On this condition is True.
84 Relay Output 1 - If relay output 1 is On this condition is True.
85 Relay Output 2 - If relay output 2 is On this condition is True.
86 Timer A - True if Timer A has expired.
87 Timer B - True if Timer B has expired.
88 Less Than (<) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns True if A<B else False is returned.
89 Equal (=) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns True if A=B else False is returned.
90 Greater Than (>) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns True if A>B else False is returned.
100 Logical Variable A - Logical variable A is tested for True/False
101 Logical Variable B - Logical variable B is tested for True/False
102 Logical Variable C - Logical variable C is tested for True/False
103 Logical Variable D - Logical variable D is tested for True/False
104 Logical Variable E - Logical variable E is tested for True/False
105 Logical Variable F - Logical variable F is tested for True/False
106 Logical Variable G - Logical variable G is tested for True/False
107 Logical Variable H - Logical variable H is tested for True/False
108 Logical Variable I – Logical variable I is tested for True/False
109 Logical Variable J - Logical variable J is tested for True/False
150 Heater - If the trickle current heater is running then this condition is True else it is False.

Table 10-2 PLC Logical Operators
ID Description
0 OR - Performs logical OR operation on input conditions
1 AND - Performs logical AND operation on input conditions
2 XOR - Performs logical XOR operation on input conditions
3 NOR - Performs logical NOR operation on input conditions
4 NAND - Performs logical NAND operation on input conditions
Table 10-3 PLC Actions

ID Description
Digital Output 1 - If the input condition is True then Digital Output 1 (J2-17,18) will be active otherwise it is inactive.
0
NOTE: Digital output 1 must have been set to “PLC” using P1501
Digital Output 2 - If the input condition is True then Digital Output 2 (J2-19,20) will be active otherwise it is inactive.
1
NOTE: Digital output 2 must have been set to “PLC” using P1502
Relay Output 1 - If the input condition is True then Relay Output 1 (J3-25,26,27) will be active otherwise it is inactive.
2
NOTE: Relay output 1 must have been set to “PLC” using P1503
3 Reserved (Workbench - Fault)
Drive Enable/Disable - If the condition is True then the drive is capable of producing power. If the condition is False
4 the drive is disabled. NOTE: If not programmed, J2-8 alone enables the drive. NOTE: The drive's hardware enable
input (J2-8) must be is active for this action.
Jog Reverse - If the condition is True then the motor will jog in the reverse direction at the speed set by P1201 if
5
jogging is enabled. NOTE: If both jog forward and reverse are active the motor stops
Jog Forward - If the condition is True then the motor will jog in the forward direction at the speed set by P1201 if
6
jogging is enabled. NOTE: If both jog forward and reverse are active the motor stops
7 Reserved (Workbench - Hold)
8 Stop Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True the motor is stopped.
9 Reserved (Workbench - Error Deceleration)
10 Reserved (Workbench - Cancel)
11 Reserved (Workbench - Disable)
12 Reserved (Workbench - Forced Abort)
13 Reserved (Workbench - Fast Gear)
18 Jog Enable - Allows jogging if True else jogging is disabled.
Fault - If the input condition is True a “PLC Fault” is triggered. If using J2-16 to generate a PLC Fault Condition,
19
P2201 must be set to “OFF” to avoid a conflict with external trip.
20 Forward Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True forward motion is enabled otherwise it is disabled.
21 Reverse Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True reverse motion is enabled otherwise it is disabled.
Acc/Dec Group Select - If the input condition is True then Acc/Dec group 2 is selected otherwise group 1 is
22
selected. NOTE: If this action is not programmed Group 1 is active by default.
Reset - If the input condition is True a reset request is issued. NOTE: This action is edge triggered on a False to True
23
transition. NOTE: Pre-existing faults/alarms may or may not be cleared.
Preset Speed/Analog - If the input condition is True then the Preset Speed Select Table Index sets the speed
reference from the Preset Speeds (P1001-P1015) else the Command Source (P1402) selects the speed reference.
24
NOTE: If this action is not programmed P1402 is always active. NOTE: If the Preset Speed Select Table Index is not
programmed then P1001 is used.
Preset Speed Select Table Index Bit 0 - If the input condition is True then bit 0 of the Preset Speed Select Table
25
Index is set else it is reset. NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 0 is reset.
26
27

Table 10-3 PLC Actions Continued
ID Description
28
Process PID Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True then the Process PID is active otherwise it is inactive.
29
NOTE: The Process PID is automatically set to inactive during keypad control or while jogging.
Keypad - If the input condition is True then forward/reverse and stop commands along with the keypad's local
30
speed reference control the drive. The keypad is disabled by default.
Electronic Pot - If the input condition is True the Electronic Pot sets the speed reference otherwise it is not active.
31
The pot is disabled by default.
Decrease Electronic Pot Speed Reference - If the input condition is True the Electronic Pot speed reference is
32 increased else has no affect. NOTE: E-Pot is non-volatile. NOTE: E-Pot is unipolar so direction is determined by
forward/reverse commands.
Increase Electronic Pot Speed Reference - If the input condition is True the Electronic Pot speed reference is
33 decreased else has no affect. NOTE: E-Pot is non-volatile. NOTE: E-Pot is unipolar so direction is determined by
forward/reverse commands.
Parameter Table Select Enable - If the input condition is True enables parameter table selection through the
34
parameter table select index, else parameter table selection is disabled.
Parameter Table Select Index Bit 0 - If the input condition is True then bit 0 of the Parameter Table Select Index
35 is set else it is reset. NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 0 is reset. NOTE: This index sets the active
parameter table.
Parameter Table Select Index Bit 1 - If the input condition is True then bit 1 of the Parameter Table Select Index
36 is set else it is reset. NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 1 is reset. NOTE: This index sets the active
parameter table.
Relay Output 2 - If the input condition is True then Relay Output 2 (J3-28,29,30) will be active otherwise it is inactive.
37
NOTE: Relay Output 2 must have been set to “PLC” using P1504.
Torque/Speed Mode - If the input condition is True then the drive controls torque else it controls speed. Default is
38
speed control. NOTE: For V/F, torque control is not supported and is ignored.
Seed E-Pot - If the condition is true, the current speed reference is seeded into the E-Pot speed reference.
39
Otherwise, it is not seeded. NOTE: E-Pot must not be the active speed reference for seeding to occur.
40 Logical Variable A - If the input condition is True then logical variable A is set else reset.
41 Logical Variable B - If the input condition is True then logical variable B is set else reset.
42 Logical Variable C - If the input condition is True then logical variable C is set else reset.
43 Logical Variable D - If the input condition is True then logical variable D is set else reset.
44 Logical Variable E - If the input condition is True then logical variable E is set else reset.
45 Logical Variable F - If the input condition is True then logical variable F is set else reset.
46 Logical Variable G - If the input condition is True then logical variable G is set else reset.
47 Logical Variable H - If the input condition is True then logical variable H is set else reset.
48 Logical Variable I - If the input condition is True then logical variable I is set else reset.
49 Logical Variable J - If the input condition is True then logical variable J is set else reset.
50 Start Timer A - If the input condition is True zero Timer A else count up to a timeout.
51 Stop Timer A - If the input condition is True, set Timer A= P3440 counts else do nothing.
52 Start Timer B - If the input condition is True, set Timer B= 0 else count up to a timeout.
53 Stop Timer B - If the input condition is True, set Timer B= P3441 counts else do nothing.
54 Start Timer C - If the input condition is True, set Timer C= 0 else count up to a timeout.
55 Stop Timer C - If the input condition is True, set Timer C= P3442 counts else do nothing.
56 Start Timer D - If the input condition is True, set Timer D= 0 else count up to a timeout.
57 Stop Timer C - If the input condition is True, set Timer D= P3443 counts else do nothing.
58 Pulse Start Timer A – If the input condition is True and timer A has expired then restarts timer A.
59 Pulse Start Timer B – If the input condition is True and timer B has expired then restarts timer B.
60 Pulse Start Timer C – If the input condition is True and timer C has expired then restarts timer C.
61 Pulse Start Timer D – If the input condition is True and timer D has expired then restarts timer D.

Table 10-3 PLC Actions Continued
ID Description
Reset PLC – If the input condition is True then a PLC reset is performed. All timers are expired and all logical
69
variables are set to FALSE. Comparators are not affected.
Jump 0-29 – If the input condition is True then a jump from the current rung number to the specified rung number
70-
is performed. Skipped rungs are not executed. Only forward jumps are allowed. Jumps from high to lower rungs or
99
jumps to the same rung number result in an error.
150 Heater - If the input condition is true then trickle current heating is enabled else it is disabled.
Table 10-4 Preset Speed Select Index

ID of PLC Actions
Description
28 27 26 25
0 0 0 0 Preset Speed 1 (P1001) Selected
1 1 1 1 Zero Speed (Not Defined) Selected
Table 10-5 Parameter Table Select Index

ID of PLC Actions
Description
36 35
0 0 Parameter Table 1 (P52 set to T1) Selected

10.5 PLC Mode as Standard Run 2Wire Mode
This example shows how the PLC Mode may operate as the Standard Run 2Wire Mode.
These parameter values are entered from the keypad.
Initialization:
Parameter Value Comment
P1401 PLC PLC operating mode selected
PLC Mode configuration parameters:

Parameter Parameter Dec
Byte 3 Condition Byte 2 Logic Byte 1 Condition Byte 0 Action
Number Value
P3401 050.000.000.020 Input 1 (50) OR (0) False (0) Forward (20)
P3402 051.000.000.021 Input 2 (51) OR (0) False (0) Reverse (21)
P3403 052.000.053.018 Input 3 (52) OR (0) Input 4 (53) Jog Enable (18)
P3404 052.000.000.006 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Jog Forward (6)
P3405 053.000.000.005 Input 4 (53) OR (0) False (0) Jog Reverse (5)
P3406 054.000.000.022 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) Acc/Dec Group (22)
P3407 055.000.000.024 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Presets/Analog (24)
P3408 056.000.000.023 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Reset (23)
P3409 057.003.000.019 Input 8 (57) NOR (3) False (0) Fault (19)
J1 J2
10K Pot or Forward Run
0 - 10 VDC Reverse Run 10
3 Analog Ref. Power +
Jog Forward
Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ 11 Digital Input 3
Jog Reverse
Accel/Decel Select
Preset Speed 1 14 Digital Input 6
7 Analog Output 2
Fault 16 Digital Input 8
The Parameter Dec Value column can be used when entering the PLC configuration parameters at the keypad (parameters
are shown as decimal long values - byte3.byte2.byte1.byte0).
For this mode Enable is active.
Note that Preset Speed 1 is active so the Preset Speed Select Table Index need not be programmed since it automatically
follows action 24 (Presets/Analog)
Jog is enabled anytime input 3 or 4 is on while these same inputs set the direction for jog.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger whenever digital input 8 goes low.

10.6 PLC Mode as 15 Preset Speed Mode
This example shows how the PLC Mode creates the 15 Preset Speed Mode.
Initialization:

Number Value
P3403 001.000.000.035 True (1) OR (0) False (0) Presets/Analog (24)
P3404 052.000.000.025 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 0 (25)
P3407 055.000.000.028 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 3(28)
P3408 052.001.053.040 Input 3 (52) AND (1) Input 4 (53) Variable A (40)
P3409 054.001.055.041 Input 5 (54) AND (1) Input 6 (55) Variable B (41)
P3410 100.001.101.023 A (100) AND (1) B (101) Reset (23)
P3411 056.000.000.022 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Acc/Dec Group (22)
J1 J2
* Enable
Switch 1 11
4 Analog Input 2+ Digital Input 3
Switch 2 12
5 Analog Input 2- Digital Input 4
Switch 3 13
6 Analog Output 1 Digital Input 5
Switch 4 14
7 Analog Output 2
Accel/Decel
Digital Input 6
15 Digital Input 7
Note that Preset Speed 1 is active so the Preset Speed Select Table Index need not be programmed since it automatically
follows action 24 (Presets/Analog).
Jog is enabled anytime input 3 or 4 is on while these same inputs set the direction for jog.

10.7 PLC Mode as Process PID Mode
This example shows how the PLC Mode rendered as the Process PID Mode.
Initialization:

Number Value
P3403 001.000.000.034 True (1) OR (0) False (0) Param Table Select (34)
P3404 052.000.000.035 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Table Select Bit 0 (35)
P3405 053.000.000.038 Input 4 (53) OR (0) False (0) Torque/Speed (38)
P3406 054.000.000.029 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) PID (29)
P3407 055.000.000.018 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Jog Enable (18)
J1 J2
* Enable
4 Analog Input 2+ Table Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Speed/Torque 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Process Mode Enable 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Jog 14 Digital Input 6
The unconditional True statement P3403 enables parameter table select (Table 10-5 ) at all times.

10.8 PLC Mode as a Modified Process PID Mode
This example shows how the PLC Mode as a modified Process PID Mode.
Initialization:
P1501 PLC Digital Output 1 Set by PLC Mode Logic
P3431 10 Comparator A monitors absolute speed demand (P10)
P3432 20% Comparator A’s constant (12 Hz for 60 Hz max)
P3440 3.00 sec Timer A set for 3 seconds

Parameter Parameter Dec Byte 3 Condition Byte 2 Logic Byte 1 Condition Byte 0 Action
Number Value
P3401 076.000.000.040 Comp A (76) OR (0) False (0) A (40)
P3404 100.000.000.038 A (100) OR (0) False (0) Torque/Speed (38)
P3405 053.002.100.029 Input 4 (53) XOR (2) A (100) PID (29)
P3406 054.000.055.018 Input 5 (54) OR (0) Input 6 (55) Jog Enable (18)
P3408 055.000.000.005 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Jog Reverse (5)
P3410 057.000.000.050 Input 8 (57) OR (0) False (0) Start Timer (50)
P3411 086.000.000.019 Timer A (86) OR (0) False (0) Fault (19)
J1 J2
* Enable
4 Analog Input 2+ PID 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Jog Enable 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Jog Forward 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Jog Reverse 14 Digital Input 6
Fault 16 Digital Input 8
Use of logical variables A, B, C or D allows for complex PLC logic.
Variable “A” is set based on the outcome of a comparator and then used as an input condition for the torque/speed select
and PID actions.

Note that P3401 is programmed to set logical variable “A” before it is used since statements are executed in order from
P3401 through P3410.
Either input 5 or 6 enable jog and they also set jog direction as in P3407 and P3408.
Speed mode is active above 12 Hz but torque mode is active when less than 12Hz.
The PID becomes active above 12 Hz if input 4 is ON.
The PID becomes active at less than 12 Hz when input 4 is OFF.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger after a three second delay following digital input 8 going low.
Timer A is used to implement this action.
Normally P3410 continuously resets Timer A when digital input 8 is high.
If digital input 8 goes low then high in less than three seconds no fault action occurs since Timer A is reset before it has a
chance to timeout.
If digital input 8 goes low and stays low for at least 3 seconds then Timer A does timeout and a fault occurs.

Chapter 11
Composite Reference Description
11.1 Overview
This reference is mathematically computed from any two valid drive parameters. Once configured, it can provide a signal to
drive the speed loop, torque loop or process PID. In addition, this reference can drive all existing operating modes including
the PLC Mode. Composite Ref can be referenced to any valid input:
P1402 - Command Source P2310 - Auxiliary Filter Source P1415 - Current Limit Source
P2603 - Process PID Feedback Source P1418 -Torque Feedforward Source P2604 - Process PID Setpoint Source
Mathematical operations are performed at each stage in its development providing the ability to add, subtract, multiply or
divide any two parameters to form a complex internal reference source. This reference source can influence the operation of
all existing operating modes including PLC Mode. The Composite Reference Parameter Block is programmed in the Level 3,
Composite REF parameters.
Figure 11-1 Composite Reference Generator Block Diagram
Stage 1 (P3501 & 3507) Stage 2 (P3502)

Scale Factor Math Function
Variable A Px Py Py Pz
Px * K1
Py = Pz = F(Py )
Max P x
Stage 3 (P3505) Stage 4 (P3506)
Pz Binary Operator Math Function
Output is = ± 100% Ry
Rx Rx with Limit Setting Ry
Stage 1 (P3503 & 3508) Stage 2 (P3504) Pc
Scale Factor Math Function Ry = F(Rx )
Variable B Pa Pb Pb Pc Rx = (Pc )O(Pz )
Pa * K2
Pb = Pc = F(Pb )
Max Pa
Output is = ± 100%
Table 11-1 Math Functions (P3506)

ID Function Description Notes
0 0 Zero1 1. Zero Function, F(x) = 0
1 X Identity2 2. Identity Function, F(x) = x
3. Where, |x| is the absolute value function:
2 |X| Absolute Value3 |x|= x for x ≥ 0
3 1/X Inversion |x|=-x for x < 0
4. The ramp generator is computed as follows:
4 X 2
Square 0.0 1.0 for x > 0
5 √(|X|) Square Root3 Constant output for x = 0
0.0 -1.0 for x < 0
6 Sin(x) Sine With time period equal to 1.0/(|x|•100) Sec
5. The frequency generator is computed
7 Cos(x) Cosine
as follows: y = Ramp(x) Freq(x) = Sin(2πy) With
8 Ramp(x) Ramp Generator4 output frequency equal to |x|•100 Hz
9 Freq(x) Frequency Generator5
Table 11-2 Binary Operator Selection Parameter (P3505)

ID Function Description Notes
0 + Sum 1. Y = Max(x, y) provides the maximum
1 - Difference 2. Y = Min(x, y) provides the minimum
2 • Multiply
3 / Divide
4 Max Maximum1
5 Min Minimum2
MN764 Composite Reference Description 11-1

Table 11-3 Composite Reference Parameters
Stage P# Description
1 3501 & Scale Factor - Monitor a parameter number (Variable A or B) and scales the value into percentage of
3503 maximum value for use by the next stage. As an example, P3501=5 Motor Voltage (assume its maximum
is 230V) is monitored and internally 20% is computed for P5= 46 V or 10% for P5=23 V. Likewise, with
P3503=11 then Speed Demand (assume its maximum is 60 Hz) is monitored and 50% is output when
P11=30 Hz or –50% when P11= -30 Hz.
P3501 or P3503 can be can be set to any valid drive parameter number. If either is set to an invalid
parameter number Py=0% or Pb=0%.
P3501 or P3503 only point to a valid parameter number in the active parameter table, never a parameter
outside the active table. Switching parameter tables with the drive enabled causes the Composite
Reference to be redefined by the parameter values in the new active parameter table.
2&4 3502,
Math Function - These parameters select the mathematical functions to be applied at the second and
3504 &
fourth stage of the Composite Reference's derivation. Refer to Table 11-1.
3506
3 3505 Operator - This parameter provides the mathematical operation to be performed at the third stage of the
Composite Reference derivation. Refer to Table 11-2 .
1 3507 & These parameters provide a way to scale up or down the percentage calculation of the first stage. They
3508 range from -1000.00 to 1000.00 with default 1.00. Normally, the defaults work so these parameters need
not be changed.
A simple example of their use is: A 5A motor is connected to a 15A (peak) drive. When the motor is at
rated amps only 5/15 or 33.3% is passed on to stage 2, but by setting P3507=3.00, 100% is passed on
allowing full use of the motor’s current.
11.2 Composite Reference Examples

The following table gives examples of the kinds of Composite References that may be developed.
Table 11-4 Examples

Composite Reference Parameters
Description
P3501 P3502 P3503 P3504 P3505 P3506 P3507 P3508
Average of Analog Inputs 1&2:

P103 Identity P104 Identity Sum Identity 0.5 0.5
Ry = (A1+A2)/2
Signal Generator with Magnitude

P103 Identity P104 Freq Multiply Identity 1.0 1.0 set by A1 and Frequency by A2:
Ry = A1 x Freq(A2)
P103 Identity P104 Identity Divide Identity 1.0 1.0 Ratio of Analog Inputs 1&2: Ry = A1/A2
Square Root of Difference of Squares

Square
P102 Square P104 Square Difference 1.0 1.0 of Process Error and Analog2:
Root
Ry = √(|Pe2 – A22|)
11-2 Composite Reference Description MN764

Chapter 12
Monitor and RTC Description
12.1 Monitor Parameters (P0001 to P0818)
Monitor parameters can be viewed using the WorkBench software. Most are read only (P0001) but some (P0052) can be
written as well.
Table 12-1 Monitor Parameters Descriptions

P# Type Name Unit Help
1 SOFTWARE VERSION Software Version. - Drive firmware version number
Local/Remote Status. - Source of run/stop commands. Local for
2 LOC/REM STATUS
keypad or Remote for terminal block
3 DRIVE STATUS Drive Enable Status. - 0 for disabled, 1 for enabled
Motion Status. - Status: stopped, forward, reverse, bipolar, sleep,
4 MOTION STATUS
homing, etc.
5 MOTOR VOLTS V Motor Volts. - Estimated line-to-line drive output RMS voltage
6 MOTOR CURRENT A Motor Current. - Measured motor RMS current
7 MOTOR ABS SPEED RPM Motor Absolute Speed. - Estimated rotor speed
Speed Reference. - Setpoint speed for motor. Command source
9 SPEED REF Hz
parameter determines the source
Absolute Speed Demand. - Absolute speed output from Speed
10 ABS SPEED DEMAND Hz
Profiler.
11 SPEED DEMAND Hz Speed Demand. - Signed speed output from Speed Profiler
12 ABS MOTOR FREQ Hz Absolute Motor Frequency. - Estimated motor electrical frequency
13 MOTOR FREQ Hz Motor Frequency. - Signed motor frequency
14 DRIVE TEMP °C Drive Temperature. - Measured temperature of drive heat sink
Bus Voltage. - Measured bus voltage. DC bus high fault occurs above
15 BUS VOLTAGE V
400/820V DC
Overload Remaining. - Current overload count remaining until overload
16 OVERLOAD LEFT %
fault/foldback occurs
Digital Inputs. - State of terminal block digital inputs. Off/On indicated
17 INPUTS
by 0/1
Digital Outputs. - State of the terminal block digital/relay outputs. Off/
18 OUTPUTS
On indicated by 0/1
19 RATED HP HP Rated Horsepower. - Drive rated horsepower
20 RATED CURRENT A Rated Current. - Nominal/derated drive continuous RMS current rating
Rated Peak Current. - Nominal/de-rated drive peak, short term,
21 RATED PK CURRENT A
current rating
22 RATED VOLTS V Rated Voltage. - Nominal voltage rating of drive
23 ACTIVE FAULTS Active Faults. - Number of active / simultaneous drive faults
24 ACTIVE FLT CODE Active Fault Code. - Currently active drive fault code number
25 PROC FEEDFORWARD % FF Process Feedforward. - Process PID feed forward signal
26 PROC SETPOINT % SP Process Setpoint. - Process PID set point signal
27 PROC FEEDBACK % FB Process Feedback. - Process PID feedback signal
ADC User Reference. - Hardware ADC reference voltage for analog
28 ADC USER REF V
inputs
ADC Current Reference. - Hardware ADC reference voltage for
29 ADC CURR REF V
currents
30 USER 24V V User 24V. - Measured, internally supplied 24V for I/O
Motor Torque. - Estimated motor torque from measured currents and
31 MOTOR TORQUE NM
motor model
32 AUTO-TUNE PROG % Auto-Tune Progress. - Estimated progress of auto-tune test
MN764 Monitor and RTC Description 12-1

Table 12-1 Monitor Parameters Descriptions Continued
33 LINE VOLTAGE V Line Voltage. - Estimated drive input line-to-line RMS voltage
34 RATED A/V V Rated Amps/Volt. - Nominal drive current scaling set at the factory
35 MOTOR POLES Motor Poles. - Calculated /entered number of motor poles
36 RUN TIMER HR Run Timer. - Accumulated drive run (non-idle) time in hours
37 ACTIVE ALARMS Active Alarms. - Number of currently active /simultaneous alarms
38 ACT ALARM CODE Active Alarm Code. - Currently active alarm code
Analog Input 1. - Measured value of analog input #1 on terminal input
39 ANA IN1 V
J1-2 and J1-1
Analog Input 2. - Measured value of analog input #2 on terminal input
40 ANA IN2 V
J1-4 and J1-5
Analog Output 1. - Estimated value of analog output #1 on terminal
41 ANA OUT1 V
J1-6
Analog Output 2. - Estimated value of analog output #2 on terminal
42 ANA OUT2 V
J1-7
43 OPTION1 Option 1. - Option board detected in option slot #1 (left slot)
44 OPTION2 Option 2. - Option board detected in option slot #2 (right slot)
46 DATE AND TIME Current Date and Time. - Real time clock current reading
47 DST STATUS DST Status. - Daylight Saving Time status: 0=Not Active 1=Active
MOTOR OVERLOAD Current overload count remaining until a motor overload fault/overload
48 %
REMAINING occurs
LAST MOTOR
49 OVERLOAD % Last reading of motor overload left before power down
REMAINING
LAST DRIVE
50 OVERLOAD % Last reading of drive overload left before power down
REMAINING
52 ACTIVE PARAM TBL Active Parameter Table. – Parameter table currently in use on the drive
Power Base EEPROM Rev. - Power base EEPROM parameter revision
53 EE VER
number. Set by factory
Power Base FPGA Rev. - Power base FPGA revision control number.
54 FPGA VER
Set by factory
55 ACC/DEC DEMAND Hz/SEC Accel/Decel Demand. - Current ramp rate used by the velocity profiler
56 ID CURRENT ID Current. - D axis measured current proportional to motor flux
57 ID DEMAND A ID Demand. - D axis demand current proportional to motor flux
58 IQ CURRENT A IQ Current. - Q axis measured current proportional to motor torque
59 IQ DEMAND A IQ Demand. - Q demand current proportional to motor torque
60 POWER FACTOR Power Factor. - Ratio of (real power)/(apparent power)
61 PHASE 1 CURRENT A Phase 1(U) Current. - Phase U current
62 PHASE 2 CURRENT A Phase 2(V) Current. - Phase V current
63 PHASE 3 CURRENT A Phase 3(W) Current. - Phase W current
64 VD DEMAND V VD Demand. - D axis voltage demand for setting up motor flux
65 VQ DEMAND V VQ Demand. - Q axis voltage demand for setting up motor torque
Electrical Angle. - Electrical angle used to develop phased voltages to
66 ELECTRICAL ANGLE °
the motor
67 MOTOR SPEED RPM Motor Speed. - Current speed of the motor
68 AT TEST DESC Autotune Test Description. - Description of current autotuning state
Application Layer Error. Application layer error code number. The last
69 R/W APP LAYER ERROR
error that occurred
12-2 Monitor and RTC Description MN764

70 USB TRANSACTIONS USB Transactions. Total number of USB transactions since start up
71 USB ERRORS USB Errors. Total number of USB errors since start up
Task Status. Runtime task overrun status. Bits correspond to tasks
72 TSK STATUS
that have overrun their time limit
73 TSK ID Task ID. First task that overran its time slot
Task Count. Total number of overruns for the first task to overrun its
74 TSK COUNT
time slot
75 Kp PACKETS Keypad Packets. Total number of processed keypad packets
76 Kp T-GAPS Keypad Gaps. Total number of keypad inter-packet time gap errors
Keypad NAKs. Total number of NAKs sent. High word are received
77 Kp NAKs
NAKs low word is transmitted NAKs
Estimated Power. - Drive power output estimated from measured
78 EST POWER kW
current and voltages. Units: KW
Estimated Energy. - Delivered by drive. Estimated from measured
79 EST ENERGY kWH
current and voltages. Units: kHW
Estimated Cost. - Cost of output energy delivered. Estimated from
80 EST COST $
cost of kWH unit parameter
Access Key. - Parameter security access key. Contact Baldor to
81 R/W ACCESS KEY
decode the key code
82 R/W KEYPAD SOFT VER Keypad Software Version. - Keypad software version string
Autotune test result. Use keypad back/forward keys to review results
83 AUTOTUNE TEST RE
on the keypad
Autotune test result. Use keypad back/forward keys to review results
84 AUTOTUNE TEST RE
on the keypad
85 CMD TYPE Command Type. Operating mode input signal command type
FPGA Read Errors. Number of errors when reading FPGA since start
86 FPGA READ ERRORS
up
FPGA Write Errors. Number of errors when writing to FPGA since start
87 FPGA WRITE ERROR
up
88 FPGA ALARM REG FPGA Alarm Register. Alarm Latch|Alarm Status of Powerbase FPGA
89 REFRESH REQUEST Refresh Request. - Refresh parameter list request from drive to host
90 PHASE 1 VOLTAGE V Phase 1(U) Voltage. - Phase U RMS voltage
91 PHASE 2 VOLTAGE V Phase 2(V) Voltage. - Phase V RMS voltage
92 PHASE 3 VOLTAGE V Phase 3(W) Voltage. - Phase W RMS voltage
93 CUSTOM UNITS CUSTOM Custom Units. - Shows production rates according to custom units.
98 LV TEST FEEDBACK LV test feedback. - Gives feedback on state of test
99 LV TEST FE STATE Front End State. -Gives feedback on state of front end
100 ID Power Base ID. - Power Base ID Number. Set by factory
102 PROC ERROR % ER Process Error. - Process PID error signal
103 ANA1 REF % Analog Input 1 Reference. - Reference generated from analog input 1
104 ANA2 REF % Analog Input 2 Reference. - Reference generated from analog input 2
Composite Reference. - Reference generated composite reference
105 COMPOSITE REF %
parameter block.
RTC Edge Counter. - General purpose date/time edge counter used in
107 R/W RTC EDGE COUNTER
Real Time Clock Features.
RTC Virtual Outputs. - Outputs set by the RTC and mapped to real
108 R/W RTC OUTPUTS
outputs if enabled.
RTC Message Status. - Individual bits are mapped to RTC message
109 R/W RTC MSG STATUS
when set

Last Drive Power Down Date. - The date and time the drive was last
110 LAST POWERDOWN
turned off.
Component A of Composite Reference. - First part of the composite
111 COMPONENT A %
reference signal.
Component B of Composite Reference. - First part of the composite
112 COMPONENT B %
reference signal.
PLC Mode Timer A Counter. - General purpose timer/counter in 10ms
113 R/W PLC TIMER A
clock ticks.
PLC Mode Timer B Counter. - General purpose timer/counter in 10ms
114 R/W PLC TIMER B
clock ticks.
115 ENC POS FB SPEED % Speed reference set by Pulse Follower EXB.
ID number of last executed macro (none if no macros have been
116 MACRO STATUS
executed).
PLC Mode Timer C Counter- General purpose timer/counter in 10ms
117 R/W PLC Timer C
clock ticks.
PLC Mode Timer D Counter - General purpose timer/counter in 10ms
118 R/W PLC Timer D
clock ticks.
Local Speed Reference. - Local speed reference from keypad.
201 LOC SPEED REF Hz
Reference can be entered in Hz or RPM
202 E-POT SPEED REF Hz E-Pot Speed Ref. - Electronic pot speed reference
301 FAULT LOG TIME Fault Log Time. Time stamp for fault log entries
302 FAULT LOG MSG Fault Log Message.
503 OPT1 ANA IN1 V/mA Option 1 Analog Input 1. Option board 1 analog input 1
507 OPT1 ANA OUT1 V/mA Option 1 Analog Output 1. Option board 1 analog output 1
508 OPT1 ANA OUT2 V/mA Option Board 1 Analog Output 2. Option 1 analog output 2
PF Tx Counts. PF transmitted accumulated position in encoder pulses
511 TX CNTS CNT
per revolution
PF Tx Revolutions. PF transmitted accumulated revolutions since
512 TX REVS REVS
power up. Encoder PPR parameter sets the revolution count
PF Rx Counts. PF received accumulated position in encoder pulses
513 RX CNTS CNT
per revolution
PF Rx Revolutions. PF received accumulated revolutions since power
514 RX REVS
up. Encoder PPR parameter sets the revolution count
Option Card 1 Configuration Word 1. Slot 1 option card's general
515 OPT1 CONFIG1
purpose config data from its EE
516 OPT1 CONFIG2
517 OPT1 CONFIG3
518 OPT1 CONFIG4
519 OPT2 CONFIG1
520 OPT2 CONFIG2

521 OPT2 CONFIG3
522 OPT2 CONFIG4
530 OPT1 FIRMWARE Option Card 1 Firmware Version. Option card 1 firmware version string
531 OPT2 FIRMWARE Option Card 2 Firmware Version. Option card 2 firmware version string
Option Card 1 Configuration Status. Slot 1 option card's configuration
532 OPT1 CONFIG
status
Option Card 2 Configuration Status. Slot 2 option card's configuration
533 OPT2 CONFIG
status
534 OPT1 RUN STATUS Option Card 1 Runtime Status. Slot 1 option card's run time status
535 OPT2 RUN STATUS Option Card 2 Runtime Status. Slot 2 option card's run time status
Option Card 1 Analog Input 1 Reference. Reference generated from
536 OPT1 ANA1 REF %
analog input 1 on option card 1
537 OPT1 ANA2 REF %
538 OPT2 ANA1 REF %
539 OPT2 ANA2 REF %
801 FAULT LATCH Fault Latch. Fault trace signal: powerbase fault active high latch
802 ALARM LATCH Alarm Latch. Fault trace signal: powerbase alarm active high latch
803 ADC CURRENT REF V ADC Current Reference. Fault trace signal: ADC 1.5V current reference
804 24V REF V 24V Reference. Fault trace signal: 24v reference
807 USER INPUTS User Digital Inputs. Fault trace signal: user digital inputs
806 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Digital Outputs. Fault trace signal: all digital outputs
807 ANA INPUT 1 V Analog Input 1. Fault trace signal: analog input 1
808 ANA INPUT 2 V Analog Input 2. Fault trace signal: analog input 2
809 SPEED REF Hz Speed Reference. Fault trace signal: speed reference
810 PH1 CURRENT A Phase 1(U) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 1 current
811 PH2 CURRENT A Phase 2(V) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 2 current
812 PH3 CURRENT A Phase 3(W) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 3 current
813 MOTOR CURRENT A Motor Current. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous RMS current
814 MOTOR TORQUE NM Motor Torque. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous torque
815 MOTOR VOLTS V Motor Voltage. Fault trace signal: instantaneous voltage to motor
816 MOTOR SPEED RPM Motor Speed. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous rotor speed
817 BUS VOLTAGE V Bus Voltage. Fault trace signal: instantaneous bus voltage
818 DRIVE TEMP °C Drive Temperature. Fault trace signal: drive temperature
12.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Overview

Action Module
Action Module parameters P3601 - 3602 set the actions to be scheduled. Action 2 takes priority over action 1 should
both be scheduled to trigger within the same second. So, if action 1 turns on output 1 and action 2 turns off output 1
and they both trigger on the same seconds tick, then output 1 will appear as though to never turn on.
As a rule, once an action is taken it is latched until it is reset by another action.
Action Module selections are shown in Table 12-2.

Figure 12-1 RTC Features
Action Module Operating Modes

P3601-3602
P3605-3606
RTC P3609-3610
Message Module Alarm System

P3603-3604
P3607-3608
P3611-3612
Table 12-2 Actions (P3601 & 3602)

ID ACTION DESCRIPTION
0 None No action assigned. Default setting.
1 Digital Output 1 On Digital output 1 is turned on. P1501 set to RTC
2 Digital Output 1 Off Digital output 1 is turned off. P1501set to RTC
3 Digital Output 2 On Digital output 2 is turned on. P1502 set to RTC
4 Digital Output 2 Off Digital output 2 is turned off. P1502 set to RTC
5 Relay Output 1 On Relay output 1 is turned on. P1503 set to RTC
6 Relay Output 1 Off Relay output 1 is turned off. P1503 set to RTC
7 Relay Output 2 On Relay output 2 is turned on. P1504 set to RTC
8 Relay Output 2 Off Relay output 2 is turned off. P1504 set to RTC
9 Increment P107 Increments the RTC counter parameter
10 Decrement P107 Decrements the RTC counter parameter
11 Reset P107 Resets the RTC counter parameter
12 Digital Output 1 On with Inc Performs digital I/O with P107 increment
13 Digital Output 1 Off with Inc Performs digital I/O with P107 increment
14 Digital Output 1 On with Dec Performs digital I/O with P107 decrement
15 Digital Output 1 Off with Dec Performs digital I/O with P107 decrement
16 Digital Output 1 On with Reset Performs digital I/O with P107 reset
17 Digital Output 1 Off with Reset Performs digital I/O with P107 reset
18 Relay Output 1 On with Inc Performs digital I/O with P107 increment
19 Relay Output 1 Off with Inc Performs digital IO with P107 increment
20 Relay Output 1 On with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
21 Relay Output 1 Off with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
22 Relay Output 1 On with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset
23 Relay Output 1 Off with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset
Level 1, Output Setup Block parameters P1501-P1504 select the digital/relay output functions. P107 is the RTC counter
parameter.

Message Module (P3603 - 3604)
Message Module parameters P3603 - 3604 set the messages to be scheduled. Message selections are shown in Table 12-3.
Table 12-3 RTC Message 1&2 Parameters (P3603 & P3604)

ID ACTION DESCRIPTION
0 None (default) No message active
1 Clean Filter(s) Time to do periodic cleaning of filter(s)
2 Change Filter(s) Time to change out the filter(s)
3 Apply Oil/Lubricate Apply oil and/or lubricant necessary areas of the system
4 Service Motor Check motor cables, encoder, clean motor etc.
5 Service Drive Check drive cables, clean panels and keypad display etc.
6 Service Coolant System Check coolant pressures/levels, check for leaks, top off as needed
7 Service Heating System Check for gas leaks, clean filters, blowers and connections
8 RTC Alarm Generic real-time clock alarm
RTC Action/Message Qualifier Parameters (P3605-P3608)

Qualifier parameters shown in Table 12-4 set the interval of time of the actions and messages selected.
Table 12-4 Action/Message Qualifier Parameters (P3605 – P3608)

ID QUALIFIERS DESCRIPTION
0 Once Action/Message is scheduled once to occur on the date and time entered.
Action/Message is scheduled every second. Starting on the date and time entered and
1 Second
repeated every second thereafter.
Action/Message is scheduled every minute. Starting on the date and time entered and
2 Minute repeated every minute thereafter at the same seconds into the minute specified in the start
date and time.
Action/Message is scheduled hourly. Starting on the date and time entered and repeated
3 Hourly every hour thereafter at the same minutes and seconds into the hour as specified in the
start date and time.
Action/Message is scheduled Daily. Starting on the date and time entered and repeated
4 Daily every day thereafter at the same hour, minutes and seconds specified in the start date and
time. If the day specified does not exist for that month the action/message is skipped.
Action/Message is scheduled monthly. Starting on the date and time entered and repeated
5 Monthly every month thereafter on the same day, hour, minutes and seconds specified in the start
date and time.
Action/Message is scheduled yearly. Starting on the date and time entered and repeated
6 Yearly every year thereafter on the same month, day, hour, minutes and seconds in the start date
and time.
RTC Schedule Date Parameters (P3609-P3612)

To each action and message there is an associated start date and time. For Action 1 (P3609) is used; for Action 2 (P3610)
and for Messages 1 & 2 (P3611 and P3612) are used respectively.
The internal date and time parameter format is shown in Table 12-5.
Table 12-5 Date and Time Format (P0046)

Bits 31-26 25-22 21-17 16 15-12 11-6 5-0
Fields Year Month Day Hour Hour Bits 4-0 Minutes Seconds
(00-63) (1-12) (1-31) Bit 5 (0-23) (0-59) (0-59)
RTC Counter and Maximum Count Parameters (P107 and P3630)

Monitor parameter P107 is a general purpose RTC Counter that can be assigned as the target of a RTC action. This
parameter may be incremented, decremented or reset by RTC actions.
Parameter number P3630 sets the maximum for P107, so that: -P3630 ≤ P107 ≤ P3630.
The comparators A&B of the PLC Operating Mode along with the Composite Reference make use of the maximum setting of
a parameter for internal scaling of their operations.

RTC Daylight Saving Time Parameter (P3631)
P3631 has three settings: OFF, U.S.A (United States of America) and E.U. (European Union).
Setting it to OFF disables the DST Feature. Setting it to USA enable Daylight Saving Time for US customers. Setting it to EU
enables Daylight Saving Time for Europe based countries.
Power Cycles and RTC Edit Changes

The RTC acts like an alarm clock during power cycles, edit changes and DST (Daylight Saving Time) updates. After power
up, even though an action/message would have occurred during the power down period no action/message is issued, that
action/message is lost. The next regularly scheduled action/message will trigger on the next regularly occurring clock edge
after power up.
Likewise if the RTC is advanced by some time-offset due to editing or DST action/messages may be lost. For example,
digital output 1 is scheduled to turn on at 1:00 PM daily. At 12:15:00 PM the clock is changed to 1:15:00 PM advancing it an
hour.
The output will not turn on that day since its triggering edge never occurs.
On the other hand, if the clock is receded by one hour, that is, changed at 1:30:00 PM to 12:30:00 PM then two triggers for
digital output 1 on will have been generated that day since the RTC will have passed through 1:00 PM twice. Furthermore,
if an active RTC message is not acknowledged by an operator and power is cycled that message persists after the cycle.
The operator must acknowledge an RTC message even if power is cycled. The same is NOT true for outputs. RTC controlled
digital outputs and relays are reset at power up.
RTC Scheduling Examples

The following table gives examples of the kinds scheduled events that may be programmed.
Table 12-6 Scheduled Events Examples

Action 1 Action 2 Message 1 Message 2
P3601 Digital Out 1 ON
P3602 Digital Out 1 OFF
P3603 Change Filters
P3604 Service Heating System
P3605 Daily
P3606 Daily
P3607 Monthly
P3608 Yearly
P3609 3-Feb-07 01:00:00
P3610 3-Feb-07 02:00:00
P3611 10-Jan-06 13:30:00
P3612 10-Jul-06 13:30:00
For this example assume the drive is in Standard Run Two Wire operating mode with digital output 1 wired to FWD. The
drive would then run daily for one hour from 1:00 AM to 2:00 AM starting February 3, 2007. The same drive is scheduled for
monthly and yearly service. Filters are to be changed on the tenth of every month after lunch starting January 10, 2006. In
addition, once a year on the 10 of July the heating system is serviced after lunch as well.
RTC messages 1&2 are not logged but must be acknowledged before they are cleared.
RTC Keypad Screens

The following templates shows how these parameters are displayed on the keypad.

Keypad Screen
Line 1 Program Parameter Block Name
Line 2 Parameter Name
Line 3 Parameter List Text1 Qualifier1
Line 4 Month 1
Day 1
, Year 1
Hour 1
: Minutes 1
: Seconds1
Line 5 A Parameter Number B
Note 1: Field is editable.

Line 1 holds the screen’s name and parameter block name. Line 2 holds a parameter name. Line 3 holds list parameter text
and the scheduling qualifier. Line 4 holds the date and time. And line 5 holds the A-Function Key name, a parameter number
and the B-Function Key name.

Example one:
Keypad Screen
Line 1 Prog RTC
Line 2 ACTION 1
Line 3 Digital Output 1 ON Daily
Line 4 July 04 2006 01 : 00 : 00
Line 5 Diag C3601T1 Back


At the Level 3 At the first menu Press or to change value.
Programming Menu “RTC ACTION 1” press ENTER. RTC Action Action Press or to move cursor to
select RTC FEATURES Action Date & Time Qualifier Action Qualifier.
Press or to change value.
EDIT RTC FEATURES Press or to move cursor to
RTC ACTION 1 Date & Time.
None Once Press ENTER when finished and
Jul 04, 2006 01:00:00 save the new value.
See RTC chapter of this manual
MAX F0201 RESET for additional details.
Press to go to the Each RTC parameter can be RTC FEATURES Press or to change value.
EDIT
next RTC screen. changed by using the procedure Press or to move cursor to
described for RTC ACTION 1. RTC ACTION 2 Action Qualifier.
None Once Press or to change value.
Jul 04, 2006 01:00:00 Press or to move cursor to
Date & Time.
MAX F0201 RESET Press ENTER when finished and
save the new value.
See RTC chapter of this manual
for additional details.
Example two:
Keypad Screen
Line 1 Prog RTC
Line 2 MESSAGE 1
Line 3 Change Filter(s) Monthly
Line 4 Jul 17 2010 13 : 30 : 00
Line 5 Diag C3603T1 Back

Appendix A
Technical Specifications
A.1 VS1SP Specifications
Table A-1 VS1SP Specifications
Voltage 120 240 240 480 600
Voltage Range 95-130 180-264 180-264 340-528 515-660
Input Ratings Phase Single Phase (1-3 HP only) Three Phase (single phase with derating)
Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Impedance 1% minimum from mains connection (3% minimum for AA frame drives)
¾-3 HP, 3PH output @ 120/240VAC, 1PH input ¾-60 HP @ 240VAC, 3PH input
Horsepower
¾-500 HP @ 480VAC, 3PH input ¾-300 HP @ 600VAC, 3PH input
Overload Constant Torque (Heavy Duty) = 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 3 seconds
Output Ratings Capacity Variable Torque (Normal Duty) = 115% for 60 seconds
Frequency 0-500Hz
Voltage 0 to maximum input voltage (RMS)
Missing control power, over current, over voltage, under voltage, motor over speed, over
Vector Trip
temperature (motor or control), output shorted or grounded, motor overload
Stall Prevention Over voltage suppression, over current suppression
Protective External Output LED trip condition indicators, 4 assignable logic outputs, 2 assignable analog outputs
Features
Short Circuit Phase to phase, phase to ground
Electronic Motor
Meets UL508C (I2T)
Overload
-10 to 45°C (-10°C to 40°C for B-Frame NEMA 4X Drive)

Temperature Derate 3% per degree C above 45 to 55°C maximum ambient temperature
(40°C to 50°C for B-Frame NEMA 4X Drive)
Cooling Forced air
NEMA 1, IP20 (-1, -1T, -1B); NEMA 4X, IP66 (-4B), indoor mounting only
Enclosure Note: NEMA 4X/IP66 is not available in frame sizes C, D, E and F as a stock product but
can be supplied as part of a packaged drive.
Sea level to 3300 Feet (1000 Meters) Derate 2% per 1000 Feet (303 Meters) above 3300
Environmental Altitude
Feet
Conditions
Humidity 10 to 90% RH Non-Condensing (NEMA1); to 100% (NEMA 4X)
Shock 1G
Vibration 0.5G at 10Hz to 60Hz
Transportation
Storage -30°C to +65°C
Temperature
Duty Cycle 1.0
Note: H2D, H2E, and H2F-Frame drives are not permitted to be applied in single-phase input applications. Additionally, the
H2B-Frame NEMA 4X drive is not designed for single-phase input power.
MN764 Technical Specifications A-1

Display LCD Graphical 128x64 Pixel
Keys 14 key membrane with tactile feedback
Output status monitoring
Digital speed control
Parameter setting and display
Functions
Diagnostic and Fault log display
Motor run and jog
Keypad Display Local/Remote toggle
Forward run command
Reverse run command
LED Indicators
Stop command
Jog active
Remote Mount 200 feet (60.6m) maximum from control
(NEMA 4X requires purchase of separate keypad.)
Trip Separate message and trace log for each trip, last 10 trips retained in memory
Control Method Microprocessor controlled PWM output, selectable encoderless vector or V/Hz inverter
PWM Frequency Adjustable 1.5-5kHz STD, 5-16 kHz quiet
±5 VDC, 0-5 VDC ±10 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA; digital (keypad), Serial
Speed Setting
Comms/USB 2.0, and Modbus RTU standard
Accel/Decel 0-3600 seconds
Motor Matching Automatic tuning to motor with manual override
Mint WorkBench software available using USB2.0 port for commissioning wizard,
PC Setup Software
firmware download, parameter viewer, scope capture and cloning
Velocity Loop
Adjustable to 180 Hz (Control only)
Bandwidth
Current Loop
Adjustable to 1200 Hz (Control only)
Bandwidth
Maximum Output
500 Hz
Frequency
Full rating 5-8 kHz PWM frequency,
Quiet PWM Adjustable to 16 kHz with linear derating (between 8 - 16kHz) of 50% at 16 kHz
Control Frequency Version 600VAC controls do not allow operation above 5kHz (Size C only)
Specifications
Full rating 1.5-2.5 kHz PWM frequency,
Standard PWM Adjustable to 5 kHz with linear derating (between 2.5 - 5kHz) of 20% (240VAC) at 5 kHz
Frequency Version Adjustable to 5 kHz with linear derating (between 2.5 - 5kHz) of 25% (480/600VAC) at
5 kHz
Keypad
Standard Run 2 Wire
Standard Run 3 Wire
15 Preset Speeds
Fan Pump 2Wire
Fan Pump 3Wire
Process Control
Selectable 3 SPD ANA 2Wire
Operating Modes 3 SPD ANA 3Wire
Electronic Pot 2Wire
Electronic Pot 3Wire
Network
Profile Run
Bipolar
Pulse Follower
PLC
A-2 Technical Specifications MN764

Common Mode Rejection 40 db
Differential Full Scale Range ±5VDC, ±10VDC, 4-20 mA and 0-20 mA
Analog Input Resolution 11 bits + sign
Input Impedance 80 kOhms (Volt mode); 500 Ohms (Current mode)
Full Scale Range 0 - 10 VDC

Single Ended
Resolution 11 bits
Analog Input
Input Impedance 80 kOhms
Analog Outputs 2 Assignable

Full Scale Range AOUT1 (0-5V, 0-10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA), AOUT2 (±5V, ±10V)
Analog Outputs
Source Current 1 mA maximum (volt mode), 20mA (current mode)
Resolution 9 bits + sign
Opto-isolated Inputs 8 Assignable, 1 dedicated input (Drive Enable)

Rated Voltage 10 - 30 VDC (closed contacts std)
Digital Inputs Input Impedance 4.71 kOhms
Leakage Current 10 µA maximum
Update Rate 16 msec
Rated Voltage 5 to 30VDC

Maximum Current 60 mA Maximum
Digital Outputs
ON Voltage Drop 2 VDC Maximum
(2 Opto Outputs)
OFF Leakage Current 0.1 A Maximum
Output Conditions 31 Conditions (see Output Setup Block parameter table, Chapter 7)
Rated Voltage 5 to 30VDC or 240VAC

Digital Outputs
Maximum Current 5A Maximum non-inductive
(2 Relay Outputs)
Output Conditions 31 Conditions (see Output Setup Block parameter table, Chapter 7)
Diagnostic Indications:
Current Sense Fault Regeneration (DB) Overload Following Error
Ground Fault Soft Start Fault PWR Base Fault
Instantaneous Over Current Under Voltage Logic Power Fault
Overload Ready
Line Power Loss Parameter Loss
Microprocessor Failure Overload
Over temperature (Motor or Control) Overvoltage
Over speed Torque Proving

Note: All specifications are subject to change without notice

A.2 Specifications for Terminal Block Tightening Torque
Table A-2 Terminal Tightening Torque Specifications
Tightening Torque
TH1 and TH2
B+/R1; B+; Control J1,
Catalog No. Power TB1 Ground D1 and D2 Control J3
B-; or R2 J2, P3
(E and F-Frames Only)
In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M
VS1SP21-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP22-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP23-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP25-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP27-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP210-1B,4B,5B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP215-1B,4B,5B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP220-1B,4B,5B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP225-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP230-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP240-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP250-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 80 9.1 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP260-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 80 9.1 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP41-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP42-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP43-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP45-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP47-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP410-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP415-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP420-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP425-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP430-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP440-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP450-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP460-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP475-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4100-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4125-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4150-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4200-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4250-1 * 192 * 21.7 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4300-1 600 69 120 13.6 375 43 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4350-1 600 69 120 13.6 375 43 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4400-1 600 69 120 13.6 375 43 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4450-1 600 69 120 13.6 375 43 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP4500-1 600 69 120 13.6 375 43 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
* VS1SP4250-1 Power Terminals are 3/8–16 studs.

Table A-2 Terminal Tightening Torque Specifications (Continued)
Tightening Torque
TH1 and TH2
B+/R1; B+; Control J1,
Catalog No. Power TB1 Ground D1 and D2 Control J3
B-; or R2 J2, P3
(E and F-Frames Only)
In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M In-lbs N-M
VS1SP51-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP52-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP53-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP55-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP57-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP510-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP515-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP520-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP525-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP530-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP540-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP550-1B 35 4 35 4 35 4 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP560-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP575-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5100-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5125-1B 180 20.3 80 9.1 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5150-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5200-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5250-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP5300-1 275 31.1 120 13.6 50 5.6 6 0.68 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP61-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP62-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
VS1SP63-1B,4B,5B 12 1.36 12 1.36 12 1.36 4 0.45 2 0.23 5 0.56
A.3 Identifying the Drive by Model Number

Each drive can be identified by its model number, as shown in Figure A-1. The model number is on the shipping label and
the drive nameplate. The model number includes the drive and any options. Drive model numbers for the VS1SP drive are
provided in Tables A-3 and A-4.
Figure A-1 Drive Identification
VS1SP 2 1 5 - 1 B
VS1SP V/Hz and Sensorless Vector Control

Voltage Code
2 = 240VAC, 3PH
4 = 480VAC, 3PH
5 = 600VAC, 3PH Power Rating
6 = 120/240VAC, 1PH 15 = 15 Hp
1 = NEMA1
4 = NEMA4X (White, indoor use only)
5 = NEMA4X (Black, Dirty Duty, indoor use only)
T = Transistor
B = Both Resistor/Transistor

A.4 Storage Guidelines
If you need to store the drive, follow these recommendations to prolong drive life and performance:
• Store the drive within an ambient temperature range of -30°C to +65°C.
• Store the drive within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90%, non-condensing.
• Do not expose the drive to a corrosive atmosphere.
A.5 VS1SP Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes

Similar VS1SP drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify re-ordering and dimensioning. Refer to Figure A-2 for the
dimensions of each frame size.
Table A-3 provides VS1SP drive ratings, model numbers and frame sizes.
Table A-3 Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes – Standard 2.5 kHz PWM
Standard 2.5 kHz PWM
Input Frame Constant Torque Variable Torque

Catalog No.
Volt Size Output Output
Input Input
Amp HP KW IC IP Amp HP KW IC IP
VS1SP21-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
VS1SP22-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 11
VS1SP23-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 17.5
VS1SP25-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 26.6 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 25.3
VS1SP27-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 38.5 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 32.2
VS1SP210-1B,4B,5B 240 B 28 10 7.5 28 49 42 15 11 42 48.3
VS1SP215-1B,4B,5B 240 B 42 15 11 42 74 54 20 15 54 62
VS1SP220-1B,4B,5B 240 B 54 20 15 54 95 68 25 18.7 68 78
VS1SP225-1B 240 C 68 25 18.7 68 119 80 30 22.4 80 92
VS1SP230-1B 240 C 80 30 22.4 80 140 104 40 30 104 120
VS1SP240-1B 240 C 104 40 29 104 182 104 40 30 104 120
VS1SP250-1B 240 D 130 50 37 130 228 154 50 37 154 177
VS1SP260-1B 240 D 154 60 44 154 270 154 50 37 154 177
VS1SP41-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 3.9
VS1SP42-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 6.0 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 5.5
VS1SP43-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 8.4 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 8.8
VS1SP45-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 13.3 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 12.7
VS1SP47-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 19.3 14 10 7.5 14 16.1
VS1SP410-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 14 10 7.5 14 24.5 14 10 7.5 14 16.1
VS1SP415-1B,4B,5B 480 B 21 15 11 21 37 27 20 15 27 33.8
VS1SP420-1B,4B,5B 480 B 27 20 15 27 47 34 25 18.5 34 42.5
VS1SP425-1B,4B,5B 480 B 34 25 18.5 34 60 40 30 22 40 50
VS1SP430-1B 480 C 40 30 22 40 70 52 40 30 52 60
VS1SP440-1B 480 C 52 40 30 52 91 65 50 37 65 75
VS1SP450-1B 480 C 65 50 37 65 114 77 60 45 77 89
VS1SP460-1B 480 D 77 60 44 77 135 96 75 56 96 110
VS1SP475-1B 480 D 96 75 56 96 168 124 100 75 124 143
VS1SP4100-1B 480 D 124 100 75 124 217 156 125 93 156 179
VS1SP4125-1B 480 D 156 125 93 156 273 156 125 93 156 179
Note: IC=Continuous Current Rating; IP=Peak Current Capability

Table A-3 Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes – Standard 2.5 kHz (Continued)
Standard 2.5 kHz PWM
Input Frame Constant Torque Variable Torque
Catalog No.
Volt Size Output Output
Input Input
Amp Hp KW IC IP Amp HP KW IC IP
VS1SP4150-1 480 E 180 150 112 180 315 240 200 149 240 276
VS1SP4200-1 480 E 240 200 149 240 420 302 250 187 302 347
VS1SP4250-1 480 E 302 250 187 302 529 361 300 224 361 415
VS1SP4300-1 480 F 361 300 224 361 632 414 350 261 414 476
VS1SP4350-1 480 F 414 350 261 414 725 477 400 298 477 549
VS1SP4400-1 480 F 477 400 298 477 835 534 450 336 534 614
VS1SP4450-1 480 F 534 450 336 534 935 590 500 373 590 679
VS1SP4500-1 480 F 590 500 373 590 1033 650 550 410 650 748
VS1SP51-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 3.0 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 3.1
VS1SP52-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 4.7 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 4.5
VS1SP53-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 6.8 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 7.0
VS1SP55-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 10.7 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 10.4
VS1SP57-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 15.8 11 10 7.5 11 12.7
VS1SP510-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 11 10 7.5 11 19.3 11 10 7.5 11 12.7
VS1SP515-1B,4B,5B 600 B 17 15 11 17 30 22 20 15 22 25.3
VS1SP520-1B,4B,5B 600 B 22 20 15 22 39 27 25 18.5 27 31
VS1SP525-1B,4B,5B 600 B 27 25 18 27 47 32 30 22 32 36.8
VS1SP530-1B 600 C 32 30 22 32 56 41 40 30 41 51
VS1SP540-1B 600 C 41 40 30 41 72 52 50 37 52 60
VS1SP550-1B 600 C 52 50 37 52 91 62 60 45 62 71
VS1SP560-1B 600 D 62 60 44 62 109 77 75 56 77 89
VS1SP575-1B 600 D 77 75 56 77 135 99 100 75 99 114
VS1SP5100-1B 600 D 99 100 75 99 173 125 125 93 125 144
VS1SP5125-1B 600 D 125 125 93 125 219 144 150 112 144 166
VS1SP5150-1 600 E 144 150 112 144 252 192 200 149 192 221
VS1SP5200-1 600 E 192 200 149 192 336 242 250 187 242 278
VS1SP5250-1 600 E 242 250 187 242 424 289 300 220 289 332
VS1SP5300-1 600 E 289 300 220 289 506 289 300 220 289 332
120 AA 12 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 20 2 1.5 6.8 8.5
VS1SP61-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 8.5
120 AA 20 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 30 3 2.2 9.6 12
VS1SP62-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 12
120 AA 30 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 30 3 2.2 9.6 12
VS1SP63-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 12
Note: IC=Continuous Current Rating; IP=Peak Current Capability

Table A-4 Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes – Quiet 8.0 kHz PWM
Quiet 8.0 kHz PWM
Input Constant Torque Variable Torque
Catalog No. Size
Volt Output Output
Input Input
VS1SP21-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 4.8
VS1SP22-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
VS1SP23-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 11.0
VS1SP25-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 17.5
VS1SP27-1B,4B,5B 240 AA 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 26.6 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 25.3
VS1SP210-1B,4B,5B 240 B 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 39 28 10 7.5 28 32
VS1SP215-1B,4B,5B 240 B 28 10 7.5 28 49 42 15 11 42 48
VS1SP220-1B,4B,5B 240 B 42 15 11 42 74 54 20 15 54 62
VS1SP225-1B 240 C 54 20 15 54 95 68 25 18.7 68 78
VS1SP230-1B 240 C 68 25 18.7 68 119 80 30 22.4 80 92
VS1SP240-1B 240 C 80 30 22.4 80 140 104 40 30 104 120
VS1SP250-1B 240 D 104 40 29 104 182 130 50 37 130 167
VS1SP260-1B 240 D 130 50 37 130 228 154 60 44 154 177
VS1SP41-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 2.4
VS1SP42-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 3.9
VS1SP43-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 6.0 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 5.5
VS1SP45-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 8.4 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 8.8
VS1SP47-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 13.3 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 12.7
VS1SP410-1B,4B,5B 480 AA 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 19.3 14 10 7.5 14 17.5
VS1SP415-1B,4B,5B 480 B 14 10 7.5 14 24.5 21 15 11 21 24.2
VS1SP420-1B,4B,5B 480 B 21 15 11 21 36.8 27 20 15 27 31
VS1SP425-1B,4B,5B 480 B 27 20 15 27 47 34 25 18.5 34 39
VS1SP430-1B 480 C 34 25 18.7 34 60 40 30 22 40 46
VS1SP440-1B 480 C 40 30 22.4 40 70 52 40 30 52 60
VS1SP450-1B 480 C 40 30 22.4 40 70 52 40 30 52 60
VS1SP460-1B 480 D 65 50 37 65 114 77 60 44 77 89
VS1SP475-1B 480 D 77 60 44 77 135 96 75 56 96 110
VS1SP4100-1B* 480 D 96 75 56 96 168 124 100 75 124 143
VS1SP4125-1B* 480 D 124 100 75 124 217 156 125 93 156 179
VS1SP4150-1 480 E 156 125 93 156 273 180 150 112 180 225
VS1SP4200-1 480 E 180 150 112 180 315 240 200 149 240 300
VS1SP4250-1 480 E 180 150 112 180 315 240 200 149 240 300
VS1SP4300-1 480 F 240 200 149 240 420 302 250 186 302 347
VS1SP4350-1 480 F 302 250 186 302 529 361 300 224 361 415
VS1SP4400-1 480 F 361 300 224 361 632 414 350 261 414 476
VS1SP4450-1 480 F 414 350 261 414 725 477 400 298 477 549
VS1SP4500-1 480 F 477 400 298 477 835 534 450 336 534 614
VS1SP51-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 1.3 0.75 0.56 1.3 2.3 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 2.0
VS1SP52-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 3.0 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 3.1
VS1SP53-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 4.7 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 4.5
*Note: Quiet rating for these drives is at 5KHz PWM
Note: IC =Continuous current rating, IP= Peak Current Capability

Table A-4 Drive Ratings, Model Numbers and Frame Sizes – Quiet 8.0 kHz PWM (Continued)
Quiet 8.0 kHz PWM
Input Constant Torque Variable Torque
Catalog No. Size
Volt Output Output
Input Input
VS1SP55-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 6.8 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 7.0
VS1SP57-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 10.7 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 10.4
VS1SP510-1B,4B,5B 600 AA 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 15.8 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 10.4
VS1SP515-1B,4B,5B 600 B 11 10 7.5 11 19.3 17 15 11 17 19.6
VS1SP520-1B,4B,5B 600 B 17 15 11 17 30 22 20 15 22 25
VS1SP525-1B,4B,5B 600 B 22 20 15 22 39 27 25 18.5 27 31
VS1SP530-1B 600 C
VS1SP540-1B 600 C
VS1SP550-1B 600 C
VS1SP560-1B* 600 D 52 50 37 52 91 62 60 44 62 71
VS1SP575-1B* 600 D 62 60 44 62 109 77 75 56 77 89
VS1SP5100-1B* 600 D 77 75 56 77 135 99 100 75 89 114
VS1SP5125-1B* 600 D 99 100 75 99 173 125 125 93 125 144
VS1SP5150-1* 600 E 125 125 93 125 219 144 150 112 144 166
VS1SP5200-1* 600 E 144 150 112 144 252 192 200 149 192 221
VS1SP5250-1* 600 E 192 200 150 192 336 242 250 187 242 278
VS1SP5300-1* 600 E 192 200 150 192 336 242 250 187 242 278
120 AA 10 0.75 0.56 3.2 6.4 12 1 0.75 4.2 5.3
VS1SP61-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 4.8 0.75 0.56 3.2 6.4 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 5.3
120 AA 12 1 0.75 4.2 8.4 20 2 1.5 6.8 8.5
VS1SP62-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 8.4 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 8.5
120 AA 20 2 1.5 6.8 13.6 30 3 2.2 9.6 12
VS1SP63-1B,4B,5B
240 AA 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 13.6 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 12
*Note: Quiet rating for these drives is at 5KHz PWM

Note: IC=Continuous current rating; IP=Peak Current Capability

A.6 VS1SP Terminal Wire Gauge Specification
Table A-5 specifies the wire gauge allowed for each terminal in the drives.
Table A-5 Terminal Wire Gauge Specification
TH1/TH2
Control J1, J2
Power B+/R1, R2 & B- Ground D1/D2 Control J3
& P3
Catalog Number AWG AWG AWG (E and F-Frames Only) AWG
AWG
Min-Max Min-Max Min-Max AWG Min-Max
Min-Max
Min-Max
VS1SP21-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP22-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP23-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP25-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP27-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP210-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP215-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP220-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP225-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP230-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP240-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP250-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP260-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP41-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP42-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP43-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP45-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP47-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP410-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP415-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP420-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP425-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP430-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP440-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP450-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP460-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP475-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP4100-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP4125-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
(2) 1/0 – 250
VS1SP4150-1 (4) 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil
(2) 1/0 – 250
VS1SP4200-1 (4) 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil
* (2) 1/0 –
VS1SP4250-1 (4) 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
250 kcmil
(2) 2 – 600 (4) 2/0-500
VS1SP4300-1 (4) 6–3/0 22-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil kcmil
(2) 2 – 600 (4) 2/0-500
VS1SP4350-1 (4) 6–3/0 22-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil kcmil
(2) 2 – 600 (4) 2/0-500
VS1SP4400-1 (4) 6–3/0 22-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil kcmil
* Power Connections for VS1SP4250-1 are via 3/8–16 studs.

Table A-5 Terminal Wire Gauge Specification Continued
TH1/TH2
Control J1, J2
Power B+/R1, R2 & B- Ground D1/D2 Control J3
& P3
Catalog Number AWG AWG AWG (E and F-Frames Only) AWG
AWG
Min-Max Min-Max Min-Max AWG Min-Max
Min-Max
Min-Max
(2) 2 – (4)
VS1SP4450-1T (4) 6–3/0 22-10 30-14 28-12
600kcmil 2/0-500kcmil
(2) 2 – (4)
VS1SP4500-1 (4) 6–3/0 22-10 30-14 28-12
600kcmil 2/0-500kcmil
VS1SP51-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP52-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP53-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP55-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP57-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP510-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP515-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP520-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP525-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP530-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP540-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP550-1B 8-1 8-1 8-1 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP560-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP575-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP5100-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP5125-1B 14-3/0 14-2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
VS1SP61-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP62-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
VS1SP63-1B,4B,5B 18-6 18-6 18-6 24-14 30-14 28-12
(2) 1/0 - 250
VS1SP5150-1 (4) 14 - 2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil
(2) 1/0 - 250
VS1SP5200-1 (4) 14 - 2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil
(2) 1/0 - 250
VS1SP5250-1 (4) 14 - 2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil
(2) 1/0 - 250
VS1SP5300-1 (4) 14 - 2/0 (4) 14-2/0 26-10 30-14 28-12
kcmil

A.7 Drive Dimensions and Weights
Figure A-2 Drive Dimensions and Weights
0.25
B C
(6.35)
dia.
Exhaust
A
A1
Size # Holes Diameter inches (mm)

AA 4 0.87 (22)
0.25
B1
(6.35) Size AA OM2000A01
dia.
B C
0.35
(8.9) Exhaust
A CONDUIT INFORMATION
Size # Holes Diameter inches (mm)
3 1.115 (28.3)
B 3 1.362 (34.6)
3 1.109 (28.2)
A1 B-N4X 2 1.375 (34.9)
C 3 1.115 (28.3)
3 1.68 (42)
3 1.115 (28.3)
2 2.47 (62.7)
D 1 1.362 (34.6)
1 0.5 (12.7)
3 1.115 (28.3)
0.35 (8.9) E 2 4.0 (102)
B1 1 1.68 (43)
Size B, C, and D 1 0.5 (12.7)
F GLAND PLATE PROVIDED
(BOTTOM ENTRY)
OM2000A00, 02, 04
Dimensions inches (mm)

Weight
Size Outside Mounting
Height (A) Width (B) Depth (C) Height (A1) Width (B1) Width (B2) lb (kg)
AA 12.27 (311) 7.97 (202) 8.21 (208) 11.75 (298) 7.38 (187) - 20 (9.1)
B 18.00 (457) 9.10 (231) 9.75 (248) 17.25 (438) 7.00 (178) - 30 (13.6)
B-N4X 17.50 (444) 10.73 (273) 10.47 (266) 16.50 (419) 7.88 (200 9.76 248)
C 22.00 (559) 9.10 (231) 9.75 (248) 21.25 (540) 7.00 (178) - 60 (27.2)
D 28.00 (711) 11.50 (292) 13.00 (330) 27.25 (692) 9.50 (241) - 120 (54.4)
E 42.81 (1087) 18.75 (476) 16.05 (407) 39.75 (1010) 15.75 (400) - 250 (113.4)
F** 86.56 (2199) 31.78 (807) 24.59 (625) FLOOR MOUNT - 915 (415)*
*VS1SP4300-1 weighs 825 lbs. (374kg); all other models are 915 lbs. (415kg).
**Frame Size F drives are supplied as standard for bottom entry of conduits. Top entry styles are available in a wider cabinet.

Figure A-2 Drive Dimensions and Weights Continued
OM2000A11
Size B NEMA 4X

39.75 [1010] 41.00 [1041]
42.81 [1087]
.40 [10]
15.75 [400]
16.05 [408] OM2000A05
18.75 [476]
Size E

13.80 [350]
4.75 [121]
86.56 [2199]
81.81 [2078]
23.70 [602]
31.78 [807] 24.59 [625]

OM2000A07
Size F

Appendix B
Parameter Tables
B.1 Level 1 Parameters (Advanced Prog, Level 1 Blocks)
All parameters displayed in this appendix are Parameter Table 1 (T1) factory set values. Setting parameter P2103 to yes will
load these values into all four parameter tables. Level 1 & 2 parameters are secured by security access code (P2107).
Table B-1 Parameter Block Values Level 1

Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
PRESET SPEEDS PRESET SPEED 1 1001 0 - MAX Speed Hz 1
PRESET SPEED 2 1002 0 - MAX Speed Hz 2
RAMP RATES ACCEL TIME 1 1101 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-ACC 1 1102 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
END S-ACC 1 1103 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
DECEL TIME 1 1104 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-DEC 1 1105 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
END S-DEC 1 1106 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
ACCEL TIME 2 1107 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-ACC 2 1108 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
END S-ACC 2 1109 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
DECEL TIME 2 1110 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-DEC 2 1111 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
END S-DEC 2 1112 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
PL DEC TIME 1113 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 1.0
JOG SETTINGS JOG SPEED 1201 0 - MAX Speed Hz 7
JOG ACCEL TIME 1202 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 10.0
JOG START S-ACC 1203 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
JOG END S-ACC 1204 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
JOG DECEL TIME 1205 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 10.0
JOG START S-DEC 1206 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
JOG END S-DEC 1207 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0
JOG FORWARD 1209 0-Off 1
1-On
JOG REVERSE 1210 0-Off 1
1-On
MN764 Parameter Tables B-1

Table B-1 Parameter Block Values Level 1 (Cont.)
KEYPAD SETUP STOP KEY 1301 0-Off (Keypad Stop inactive in 1
remote).
1-On (Keypad Stop active in
remote).
STOP MODE 1302 0-Regen 0
1-Coast
RUN FORWARD 1303 0-Off 1
1-On
RUN REVERSE 1304 0-Off 1
1-On
SWITCH ON FLY (LOCAL REMOTE 1305 0-Off 0
KEY) 1-On
LOCAL HOT START 1306 0-Off 0
1-On
SPEED INCREMENT 1307 1 to 1800 RPM or 0.01 to 60 Hz 1
INIT LOCAL SPEED 1308 0-Zero 0
1-Last Speed
2-Set Speed
SET SPEED 1309 0 - MAX Speed 1
PARAMS TO KEYPAD 1310 0-Off 0
1-On
DOWNLOAD SELECT 1311 0-All 0
1-Motor
2-Other
KEYPAD TO PARAMS 1312 0-No 0
1-Yes
KEYPAD CONTRAST 1313 0 - 100% (0=dimmest, 50
100=brightest)
BACKLIGHT 1314 0-Off 1
1-On
[1] LOC TORQUE MODE 1315 0-Off 0
1-On
[1] LOC TORQUE REF 1316 -100.00 to 100.00% 0.00
INPUT SETUP OPERATING MODE 1401 0-Keypad 0
1-Standard Run 2Wire
2-Standard Run 3Wire
3-15 Preset Speeds
4-Fan & Pump 2Wire
5-Fan & Pump 3Wire
6-Process Control
7-3Spd Ana 2Wire
8-3Spd Ana 3Wire
9-E-Pot 2Wire
10-E-Pot 3Wire
11-Network
12-Profile Run
14-Bipolar
15-Pulse Follower
16-PLC
[1] Only available or active in Open Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
B-2 Parameter Tables MN764

INPUT SETUP COMMAND SOURCE 1402 0-None 1
(Continued) 1-Analog In1
2-Analog In2
3-Keypad
4-Network
5-Composite Ref
6-Opt1 Ana In1
7-Opt1 Ana In2
8-Opt2 Ana In1
9-Opt2 Ana In2
10-EXB Pulse Foll
ANA IN1 TYPE 1403 0-None 1
1-Potentiometer
ANA IN1 INVERT 1404 0-Off 0
1-On
ANA IN1 GAIN 1405 0.0% to 300.0% 100.0
ANA IN1 OFFSET 1406 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0
ANA IN1 FILTER 1407 0 (No Filter) to 6 (Max Filter) 0
ANA IN2 TYPE 1408 0-None 1
1-(-10V to +10V)
2-(-5V to +5V)
3-(4 to 20mA)
4-(0 to 20mA)
5-(0 to 10V)
6-(0 to 5V)
ANA IN2 INVERT 1409 0-Off 0
1-On
ANA IN2 GAIN 1410 0.0% to 300.0% 100.0
ANA IN2 OFFSET 1411 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0
ANA IN2 D.BAND 1412 0.0% to 75.0% 0.0
ANA IN2 FILTER 1413 0 (No Filter) to 6 (Max Filter) 0
EXT. CUR LIMIT [1] 1414 0-Off 0
1-On
CURR LMT SOURCE [1] 1415 0-None 0
1-Analog In1
2-Analog In2
3-Keypad
4-Composite Ref
5-Opt1 Ana In1
6-Opt1 Ana In2
7-Opt2 Ana In1
8-Opt2 Ana In2
9-Network
SLEEP MODE 1416 0-Off 0
1-On
CMD SLEEP BAND 1417 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00
TORQUE FF SRC [1] 1418 0-None 0
1-Analog In1
2-Analog In2
3-Keypad
4-Composite Ref
5-Opt1 Ana In1
6-Opt1 Ana In2
7-Opt2 Ana In1
8-Opt2 Ana In2

OUTPUT SETUP DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 1501 0-Drive Run 1
1-Drive Ready
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 1502 2-Drive On 8
RELAY OUTPUT 1 1503 3-Drive Stopped 9
4-Jog
RELAY OUTPUT 2 1504 5-Accelerate 17
6-Constant Speed
7-Decelerate
8-At Zero Speed
9-At Speed
10-At Set Speed
11-Curr Overload
12-Curr Underload
13-I2T Overload
14-Keypad Control
15-Dynamic Brake
16-Foldback
17-Fault
18-Alarm
19-Command Forward
20-Command Reverse
21-Motor Forward
22-Motor Reverse
23-Process Error
24-Network
25-At Position
26-In Motion
27-PLC
28-RTC
29-Powered Up
30-Par Tbl Switch
31-Heater
ZERO SPD SET PT 1505 0 - MAX Speed 6.00
AT SPD BAND 1506 0 - MAX Speed 2.00
SET SPEED POINT 1507 0 - MAX Speed 60.0
OVERLOAD SET PT 1508 0.0 - 200.0% 150.0
UNDERLOAD SET PT 1509 0.0 - 200.0% 50.0
ANA OUT1 TYPE 1510 0-(0 to +10V) 0
1-(0 to 5V)
2-(4mA to 20mA)
3-(0mA to 20mA)

OUTPUT SETUP ANALOG OUT1 SIGNAL 1511 0-Speed Ref 29
(Continued) 1-Speed Demand
2-ACC/DEC
ANALOG OUT2 SIGNAL 1514 3-Motor Current 3
4-Mag Current
5-Mag Curr Cmd
6-Load Current
7-Load Curr Cmd
8-Power Factor
9-Ph1 Current
10-Ph2 Current
11-Ph3 Current
12-Motor Voltage
13-VD Demand
14-VQ Demand
15-Bus Voltage
16-Est. Abs Torque
17-Est. Torque
18-Control Temp
19-Analog In1
20-Analog In2
21-Opt1 Ana In1
22-Opt1 Ana In2
23-Opt2 Ana In1
24-Opt2 Ana In2
25-Proc Feedforward
26-Proc Feedback
27-Proc Setpoint
28-Electric Angle
29-Abs Speed
30-Velocity
31-Network
32-Composite Ref
33-Power (kW)
34-Calibrate
ANA OUT1 GAIN 1512 0.0 - 500.0% 100.0
ANA OUT2 TYPE 1513 0-(+/-5V) 1
1-(+/-10V)
ANA OUT2 GAIN 1515 0.0 - 500.0% 100.0
CAL ANA OUT 1516 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0
MOTOR CONTROL TYPE 1601 0-V/F Control 0
CONTROL 1-Open Vector
CNTL BASE SPEED [3] 1602 0 - MAX Speed Motor
Rated
Speed
(P2403)
CNTL BASE VOLT [2] [3] 1611 0 - Drive Rated Voltage CALC
STATIC BOOST [2] [3] 1612 0.0 - 15.0% 0.0
DYN BOOST CUTIN [2] [3] 1613 6.00 - 60.00 Hz 30.00
DYNAMIC BOOST [2] [3] 1614 0.0 - 10.0% 0.0
V/F EFFICIENCY [2] [3] 1615 0-Off 0
1-On
V/F PROFILE [2] [3] 1616 0.0 - 100.0% 0
CUSTOM V/F CURVE [2] [3] 1617 0-Off 0
1-3 Point
2-7 Point
3 POINT VOLTAGE [2] [3] 1618 0.0 - 100.0% 50.0
[2] Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Vector mode.
[3] Motor related parameters (see parameter P1311).

MOTOR 3 POINT FREQ [2] [3] 1619 0.00 - MAX Speed 30.00
CONTROL
(Continued) SLIP COMP ENABLE [2] [3] 1620 0-Off 0
1-On
7 POINT FREQ 1 [2] [3] 1621 0 - MAX Speed 10
7 POINT VOLT 1 [2] [3] 1622 0.0 - 100.0% 16.7
7 POINT VOLT 2 [2] [3] 1624 0.0 - 100.0% 33.3
7 POINT VOLT 3 [2] [3] 1626 0.0 - 100.0% 50.0
7 POINT VOLT 4 [2] [3] 1628 0.0 - 100.0% 66.7
7 POINT VOLT 5 [2] [3] 1630 0.0 - 100.0% 83.3
CURR PROP GAIN [1] [3] 1633 0 - 150.00 CALC
CURR INT GAIN [1] [3] 1634 0.0 - 3000.00 Hz 150.00
SPEED PROP GAIN [1] [3] 1635 0.0 - 1000.0 5.00
SPEED INT GAIN [1] [3] 1636 0.00 - 1000.00 Hz 10.00
SPEED DIFF GAIN [1] [3] 1637 0.00 - 1.00 0.00
A.S. PROP GAIN [1] 1639 0.0 - 255.0 10.0
A.S. INT GAIN [1] 1640 0.00 - 200.00 Hz 50.0
MOTOR Xm [1] [3] 1641 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohms CALC
MOTOR R1 [3] 1642 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohms 0
MOTOR X1 [1] [3] 1643 0.000 - 1000.000 Ohms CALC
ROTOR TIME CONST [3] 1644 0.000 - 60.000 seconds CALC
MOTOR R2 [1] [3] 1645 0 - 1000 Ohms CALC
MOTOR X2 [1] [3] 1646 0-1000 Ohms CALC
TRICKLE HEAT AMPS 1678 0.0 - 50.0% of Motor Rated Amps 0.0
COMMUNI- BAUD RATE 1701 0-9600 1
CATION 1-19200
2-38400
3-56000
4-115200
PARITY 1702 0-None 0
1-Odd
2-Even
STOP BITS 1703 0-One 0
1-Two
DRIVE ADDRESS 1704 1 - 247 1
OPTION CARD RESET 1705 0-Off 0
1-Slot 1
2-Slot 2
3-Slots 1 & 2
SECURITY DEFAULT 1706 0-No 0
1-Yes
BROWSER USER ID 1707 ASCII user ID for the Ethernet baldor
Web Brower Option Board

COMMUNI- BROWSER USER ID 1708 ASCII user ID for the Ethernet baldor
CATION Web Brower Option Board
(Continued)
BROWSER PASSWORD 1709 Password for the Ethernet Web baldor
Brower Option Board
BROWSER PASSWORD 1710 Password for the Ethernet Web baldor
Brower Option Board

Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User
Setting
DRIVE LIMITS OPERATING ZONE [3] 2001 0-Std Const Torq 0
1-Std Var Torq
2-Quiet Const Torq
3-Quiet Var Torq
MIN OUTPUT SPEED [3] 2002 0 - MAX Speed Hz 0
MAX OUTPUT SPEED [3] 2003 10 - 500 Hz Rated
Motor
Speed
PWM FREQUENCY [3] 2004 1500 to 16000 Hz 2500
CURR RATE LIMIT [1] [3] 2005 0.000 - 10.000 seconds 0.004
PEAK CURR LEVEL [3] 2006 0 - Peak Rated Current CALC
REGEN TORQ LIMIT [3] 2007 0.0 - Drive Rated Peak Current in CALC
amps
REGEN ADJUST [2] [3] 2008 0 - 500 Hz/Sec 0
DRIVE SPEED UNITS 2101 0-Hz 0
CONFIGURE 1-RPM
LANGUAGE SELECT 2102 0-English 0
1-Other (Spanish, German, Italian,
French, or Portuguese)
FACTORY SETTINGS 2103 0-No 0
1-Yes
SECURITY 2105 0-Off 0
1-Local
2-Network
3-Total
ACCESS TIMEOUT 2106 1.0 - 600.0 seconds 5.0
ACCESS CODE 2107 0 - 9999 9999
ACTIVE PARAM TBL 0052 0-T1 0
1-T2
2-T3
3-T4
CLEAR FAULT LOG 2108 0-No 0
1-Yes
DEAD TIME COMP [2] 2109 0 to 100.0% 100.0
POWER INPUT 2110 0-Single Phase 2
1-Common Bus Slave
2-Three Phase
3-Common Bus Master
BUS VOLT FILTER [2] 2111 0.10 - 1000.00 Hz 10.00
EXECUTE MACRO 2112 0-No 0
1-M1
2-M2
3-M3
4-M4
5-M5
UNDO MACRO 2113 0-No 0
1-Yes

Setting
DRIVE TORQ ENABLE SEQ 2114 0-Torque on Enable 0
CONFIGURE 1-Torque on Command
(Continued)
DRIVE PROTECT EXTERNAL TRIP 2201 0-Off 0
1-On
FOLLOWING ERROR [1] 2202 0-Off 0
1-On
TORQUE PROVING [1] 2203 0-Off 0
1-On
FOLDBACK GAIN [2] [3] 2205 0.000 - 10.000 0.010
OVERLOAD 2206 0-Fault 0
1-Foldback
2-Hold
OVERLOAD TRIGGER [2] [3] 2207 0.0 - 100.0% 50.0
SINGLE PHASING [4] 2209 0-Derate 1
1-Fault
OVER TEMPERATURE 2210 0-Derate 1
1-Fault
PWR DOWN OPTIONS 2211 0-Fault 0
1-Ride Through
CNTL STP BUS LVL 2212 200 to 800V CALC
CNTL STOP DELAY 2213 0 to 3600.0 seconds 1.0
Kp RIDE THROUGH 2214 0 to 1000.0000 10.0000
Ki RIDE THROUGH 2215 0 to 1000.0000 0
MISCELLA- AUTO RESTART 2301 0-Manual 1
NEOUS 1-At Power Up
3-Both
RESTARTS/HOUR 2302 0 - 10 3
RESTART DELAY 2303 0 - 3600 seconds 3
PWM TECHNIQUE 2304 0-Space Vector 1
1-Sine Triangle
COST OF ENERGY 2305 0.00 - 99999.00$/KWH 0.10
RESET ENERGY 2306 0-No 0
1-Yes
FILTER TYPE 2309 0-None 0
1-Low Pass
2-High Pass
3-Notch
FILTER SOURCE 2310 0-None 0
1-Raw Speed
2-Torque
3-Analog In1
4-Analog In2
5-Composite Ref
6-Opt1 Ana In1
7-Opt1 Ana In2
8-Opt2 Ana In1
9-Opt2 Ana In2
[4] Not available for size AA controls.

Setting
MISCELLA- FILTER DESTINATION 2311 0-None 0
NEOUS 1-Speed Loop
(Continued) 2-Torque Loop
3-Speed FFWD
4-Process FBK
5-Process FFWD
6-Process SP
FILTER CUTOFF 2312 0.00 - 1000.00 Hz 0.00
NOTCH CNTR FREQ 2313 0.00 - 500.00 Hz 0.00
NOTCH BAND 2314 0.00 - 200.00 Hz 0.00
MOTOR DATA MOTOR RATED VOLT [3] 2401 0 - 1000 Volts CALC
MOTOR RATED AMPS [3] 2402 0 - MAX AMPS CALC
MOTOR RATED SPD [3] 2403 0 - 30000 RPM 1754
MOTOR RATED FREQ [3] 2404 10.00 - 500.00 60.00
MOTOR MAG AMPS [3] 2405 0 - 90% MAX AMPS CALC
INSTABILITY FREQ [2] [3] 2406 0.00 - 500.00 Hz 0.00
STABILITY GAIN [2] [3] 2407 0.000 - 10.000 0.000
ELEC SLIP FREQ [3] 2412 0.000 - 20.000 Hz CALC
CALC MOTOR MODEL 2414 0-No 0
1-Yes
REVERSE ROTATION [3] 2415 0-Off 0
1-On
MOTOR RATED HP [3] 2416 0 - 4 times Drive Rated HP CALC
BRAKE ADJUST RESISTOR OHMS [3] 2501 0 - 255.0 Ohms CALC
RESISTOR WATTS [3] 2502 0 - 999999 W CALC
RESISTOR TTC [3] 2503 20 - 3600 seconds CALC
DC BRAKE VOLTS [2] 2504 0 - 20.00% 0.00
DC BRAKE TRIGGER [2] 2505 0.00 - 50.0 Hz 0.00
BRAKE ON STOP [2] 2506 0-Off 0
1-On
BRAKE ON REVERSE [2] 2507 0-Off 0
1-On
STOP BRAKE TIME [2] 2508 0.0 - 60.0 seconds 0.0
BRAKE ON START [2] 2509 0-Off 0
1-On
START BRAKE TIME [2] 2510 0.0 - 60.0 seconds 0.0
PROCESS PROCESS TYPE 2601 0-None 0
CONTROL 1-Forward Acting
2-Reverse Acting
SETPOINT ADJ LIM 2602 0.0 - 100.0% 10.0

Setting
PROCESS PROCESS FEEDBACK 2603 0-None 0
CONTROL 1-Setpoint Cmd
(Continued) 2-Local Speed Ref
3-Analog In1
SETPOINT SOURCE 2604 4-Analog In2 0
5-Network
6-Composite Ref
7-Opt1 Ana In1
8-Opt1 Ana In2
9-Opt2 Ana In1
10-Opt2 Ana In2
SETPOINT COMMAND 2605 -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0
PROC ERR TOL 2606 0.0 - 100.0% 10.0
PROC PROP GAIN 2607 0.0000 - 9999.9990 1.0000
PROC INTG GAIN 2608 0.0000 - 9999.9990 0.0000
PROC INTG CLAMP 2609 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0
PROC DIFF GAIN 2610 0.0000 - 9999.9990 0.0000
PROFILE ADJUST 2611 0-Off 0
1-On
PROFILE ADJ BAND 2612 0.0 - 200.0% 50.0
PROC SLEEP BAND 2613 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0
PROC OUT FILTER 2614 0.0 - 100.0 seconds 0.00
PROC OUT OFFSET 2615 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0
PROC OUT GAIN 2616 0.0 - 200.0% 100.0
SKIP SKIP FREQ 1 2701 0 - MAX Speed Hz 0.00
FREQUENCY
SKIP BAND 1 2702 0 - MAX Speed Hz 0.00
SKIP FREQ 2 2703 0 - MAX Speed Hz 0.00
SKIP FREQ 3 2705 0 - MAX Speed Hz 0.00
SYNCHRO SYNC START FWD 2801 0-Off 0
START 1-On
SYNC START REV 2802 0-Off 0
1-On
SYNC AT MAX FREQ 2803 0-Off 1
1-On
SYNCHRO SCAN V/F 2804 1.0 - 25.0% 10.0%
V/F /
10%
Open
Vector
SYNC SETUP TIME 2805 0.5 - 10.0 seconds 0.20 V/F
/ 0.10
Open
Vector
SYNC SCAN TIME 2806 0.5 - 10.0 seconds 2.0 V/F
/ 0.50
Open
Vector
SYNC RECOVER 2807 0.1 - 10.0 seconds 1.0 V/F
/ 0.10
Open
Vector

Setting
AUTO TUNE ANA OFFSET TRIM 2901 0-No 0
1-Yes
ONE-STEP TUNING [1] 2902 0-No 0
1-Yes
STATOR R1 TUNE 2903 0-No 0
1-Yes
MEASURE Xm (ROT) [1] 2904 0-No 0
1-Yes
MEASURE LEAKAGE [1] 2905 0-No 0
1-Yes
CUR. LOOP TUNE [1] 2906 0-No 0
1-Yes
FLUX CUR. TUNE [1] 2907 0-No 0
1-Yes

PROFILE RUN NUMBER OF CYCLES 3001 0 - 255 0
PR RESTART MODE 3002 0-Restart 0
1-Continue
SPEED CURVE 1 3003 0-FWD-Group1 0
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 1 3004 0 - 65535.00 seconds 0.00
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 2 3006 0 -65535.00 seconds 0.00
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
1-REV-Group1
2-FWD-Group2
3-REV-Group2
PULSE MASTER PPR [3] 3101 50 - 20000 counts 1024
FOLLOWER
INPUT VOLTS 3102 0-5V 0
1-12V
INPUT TYPE 3103 0-None 1
1-Quadrature
2- Speed
TRACK MODE 3104 0-Velocity Following 0
INCREMENT STEP 3105 1 - 1024 1
RX RATIO INPUT [3] 3106 1 - 1048576 1024
RX RATIO OUT 1 [3] 3107 1 - 1048576 1024
RX RATIO OUT 2 [3] 3108 1 - 1048576 1024

PULSE RX RATIO OUT 3 [3] 3109 1 - 1048576 1024
FOLLOWER
(Continued) RX RATIO OUT 4 [3] 3110 1 - 1048576 1024
OUTPUT TYPE 3111 0-Quadrature 0

1-Speed
TX RATIO INPUT [3] 3112 1 - 1048576 1:1024
TX RATIO OUTPUT [3] 3113 1 - 20000 1024
SAVE RX OUT RATI [3] 3114 0-No 0
1-Yes
CUSTOM MAX DEC PLACES 3201 0 - 5 1
UNITS
VALUE AT SPEED 3202 0.0 - 9999999.0 (X.X; YRPM) 0.0: 0
UNITS OF MEASURE 3203 ASCII & Graphics Characters Cust
PLC MODE PLC LOCK 3400 0-Off 0
1-On
PLC CONFIG 1 3401 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 2 3402 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 3 3403 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 4 3404 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 5 3405 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 6 3406 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 7 3407 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 8 3408 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 9 3409 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 10 3410 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 11 3411 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 12 3412 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 13 3413 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 14 3414 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 15 3415 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 16 3416 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 17 3417 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 18 3418 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 19 3419 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 20 3420 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 21 3421 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 22 3422 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 23 3423 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 24 3424 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 25 3425 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 26 3426 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 27 3427 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 28 3428 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 29 3429 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 30 3430 0 to 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000

PLC MODE COMPARE A PARAM 3431 00000 to 10000 0
(Continued)
COMPARE A CONST1 3432 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00
COMPARE A CONST2 3433 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00
COMPARE B PARAM 3434 00000 to 10000 0
COMPARE B CONST1 3435 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00
COMPARE B CONST2 3436 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00
TIMER A DURATION 3440 0.00 to 999999.00 seconds 0.00
TIMER B DURATION 3441 0.00 to 999999.00 seconds 0.00
TIMER C DURATION 3442 0.00 to 999999.00 seconds 0.00
TIMER D DURATION 3443 0.00 to 999999.00 seconds 0.00
COMPOSITE PARAM A NUMBER 3501 00000 to 10000 0
REF
PARAM A FUNCTION 3502 0-Zero 0
1-Identitiy
2-Absolute Value
3-Invert
4-Square
5-Square Root
6-Sine
7-Cosine
8-Ramp Generator
9-Freq Generator
PARAM B NUMBER 3503 00000 to 10000 0
PARAM B FUNCTION 3504 0-Zero 0
1-Identitiy
2-Absolute Value
3-Invert
4-Square
5-Square Root
6-Sine
7-Cosine
8-Ramp Generator
9-Freq Generator
OPERATOR 3505 0-Sum 0
1-Difference
2-Multiply
3-Divide
4-Maximum
5-Minimum
FUNCTION 3506 0-Zero 1
1-Identitiy
2-Absolute Value
3-Invert
4-Square
5-Square Root
6-Sine
7-Cosine
8-Ramp Generator
9-Freq Generator
PARAM A GAIN 3507 -1000.000 to 1000.000 1.00
PARAM B GAIN 3508 -1000.000 to 1000.000 1.00

RTC RTC ACTION 1 3601 0-None 0
FEATURES 1-D.Out1 On
(Real Time 2-D.Out1 Off
Clock) 3-D.Out2 On
4-D.Out2 Off
RTC ACTION 2 3602 5-R.Out1 On 0
6-R.Out1 Off
7-R.Out2 On
8-R.Out2 Off
9-Increment
10-Decrement
11-Reset
12-D.Out1 On/IncP107
13-D.Out1 Off/IncP107
14-D.Out1 On/DecP107
15-D.Out1 Off/DecP107
16-D.Out1 On/Reset
17-D.Out1 Off/Reset
18-R.Out1 On/IncP107
19-R.Out1 Off/IncP107
20-R.Out1 On/DecP107
21-R.Out1 Off/DecP107
22-R.Out1 On/Reset
23-R.Out1 Off/Reset
RTC MESSAGE 1 3603 0-None 0
1-Clean Filter
RTC MESSAGE 2 3604 2-Change Filter 0
3-Apply Oil/Lube
4-Service Motor
5-Service Drive
6-Service Coolant
7-Service Heating
8-RTC Alarm
ACT1 QUALIFIER 3605 0-Once 0
1-Second
ACT2 QUALIFIER 3606 2-Minute 0
MSG1 QUALIFIER 3607 3-Hourly 0
4-Daily
MSG2 QUALIFIER 3608 5-Monthly 0
6-Yearly
ACT1 DATE/TIME 3609 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 01 January 2000,
31 December 2063, 23:59:59 00:00:00
ACT2 DATE/TIME 3610 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 01 January 2000,
31 December 2063, 23:59:59 00:00:00
MSG1 DATE/TIME 3611 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 01 January 2000,
31 December 2063, 23:59:59 00:00:00
MSG2 DATE/TIME 3612 01 January 2000, 00:00:00 - 01 January 2000,
31 December 2063, 23:59:59 00:00:00
RTC COUNTER MAX 3630 00000 - 99999 0
DST SELECT 3631 0-Off 0
1-U.S.A.
2-E.U.

Appendix C
CE Guidelines
C.1 Outline
This section provides general information regarding recommended methods of installation for CE compliance. It is not
intended as an exhaustive guide to good practice and wiring techniques. It is assumed that the installer of the VS1SP is
sufficiently qualified to perform the task, and is aware of local regulations and requirements. Baldor products that meet the
EMC directive requirements are indicated with a “CE” mark. A duly signed CE declaration of conformity is available from
Baldor.
C.2 EMC - Conformity and CE Marking

The information contained herein is for your guidance only and does not guarantee that the installation will meet the
requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC or the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
The purpose of the EEC directives is to state a minimum technical requirement common to all the member states within the
European Union. In turn, these minimum technical requirements are intended to enhance the levels of safety both directly
and indirectly.
Council directive 2004/108/EC relating to Electro Magnetic Compliance (EMC) indicates that it is the responsibility of the
system integrator to ensure that the entire system complies with all relative directives at the time of installing into service.
Motors and controls are used as components of a system, per the EMC directive. Hence all components, installation of
the components, interconnection between components, and shielding and grounding of the system as a whole determines
EMC compliance.
The CE mark informs the purchaser that the equipment has been tested and complies with the appropriate standards.
It rests upon the manufacturer or his authorized representative to ensure the item in question complies fully with all
the relative directives in force at the time of installing into service, in the same way as the system integrator previously
mentioned. Remember that it is the instructions of installation and the product that should comply with the directive.
Note that this drive is commercial in design. It is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which
supplies domestic premises. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case
supplementary mitigation may be required.
Wiring of Shielded (Screened) Cables

Figure C-1
Remove the outer insulation to Conductive

d
expose the overall screen. Clamp
A = 30mm max.
B = 500mm max. C
C = 30mm max.
A B
Shielded Couplings
Conductive
360 Degree Clamp
360 Degree
360 Degree Coupling Coupling
MN764 CE Guidelines C-1

C.3 EMC Installation Options
When installed for Class A or Class B operation, the control is compliant with EN55011 (1991)/ EN55022 (1994) for radiated
emissions as described.
C.4 Grounding for Wall Mounting (Class A) also see Chapter 4

Top cover must be installed.
• A single-star point (earth) is required.

• The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable or conduit between the motor
and control and be connected to the protective earth terminal at the control.
• The internal/external AC supply filter must be permanently earthed.
• The signal/control cables must be screened.
C.5 Grounding for Enclosure Mounting (Class B) also see Chapter 4

• The unit is installed for Class B operation when mounted inside an enclosure that has 10dB attenuation from 30
to 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with no opening greater than 0.15m), using the
recommended AC supply filter and having met all cable requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle will be high and components installed inside must be
sufficiently immune.
• The control, external filter and associated equipment are mounted onto a conducting, metal panel. Do not use enclosures
that use insulating mounting panels or undefined mounting structures. Cables between the control and motor must be
screened or in conduit and terminated at the control.
C.6 Use of CE Compliant Components

The following points should be considered:
• Using CE approved components will not guarantee a CE compliant system!
• The components used in the drive, installation methods used, materials selected for interconnection of components are
important.
• The installation methods, interconnection materials, shielding, filtering and earthing / grounding of the system as a whole
will determine CE compliance.
• The responsibility of CE mark compliance rests entirely with the party who offers the end system for sale (such as an OEM
or system integrator).
C-2 CE Guidelines MN764

C.7 EMC Wiring Technique
Figure C-2
1 CABINET
The drawing shows an electroplated zinc coated enclosure, which is
connected to ground. This enclosure has the following advantages:
Y-Capacitor - All parts mounted on the back plane are connected to ground.
- All shield (screen) connections are connected to ground.
Within the cabinet there should be a spatial separation between power
FILTER
wiring (motor and AC power cables) and control wiring.

2 SCREEN CONNECTIONS
All connections between components must use shielded cables. The cable
shields must be connected to the enclosure. Use conductive clamps to
ensure good ground connection. With this technique, a good ground shield
can be achieved.
3 EMC - FILTER
The EMI or main filter should be mounted next to the power supply (here
BPS). For the connection to and from the main filter, screened cables should
be used. The cable screens should be connected to screen clamps on both
sides. (Exception: Analog Command Signal).
Note: EMC compliance testing was conducted on representative drives
CONTROLLER of each frame size using Schaffner FN3258 and FN351 series filters.
4 GROUNDING (EARTH)
For safety reasons (VDE0160), all Baldor components must be connected
to ground with a separate wire. The diameter of the wire must be at minimum
AWG#6 (10mm2). Ground connections (dashed lines) must be made from the
central ground to the regen resistor enclosure and from the central ground to
the Shared Power Supply.
Minimum size of the protective earthing conductor shall comply with the local
safety regulation for high protective earthing conductor current equipment.
5 Y-CAPACITOR
The connection of the regeneration resistor can cause RFI (radio frequency
interference) to be very high. To minimize RFI, a Y-capacitor is used. The
capacitor should only be connected between the dynamic brake resistor
housing and terminal pin R1.
Attention: The drawing shows only the principle of an EMC wiring. The installation shown can be
different to any national standard (e.g. VDE).
MN764 CE Guidelines C-3

C.8 EMC Installation Instructions
To ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the following installation instructions should be completed. These steps help
to reduce interference.
Consider the following:
• Grounding of all system elements to a central ground point

• Shielding of all cables and signal wires
• Filtering of power lines
A proper enclosure should have the following characteristics:

A) All metal conducting parts of the enclosure must be electrically connected to the back plane. These connections should
be made with a grounding strap from each element to a central grounding point. [1]
B) Keep the power wiring (motor and power cable) and control wiring separated. If these wires must cross, be sure they
cross at 90 degrees to minimize noise due to induction.
C) The shield connections of the signal and power cables should be connected to the screen rails or clamps. The screen
rails or clamps should be conductive clamps fastened to the cabinet. [2]
D) The cable to the regeneration resistor must be shielded. The shield must be connected to ground at both ends.
E) The location of the AC mains filter has to be situated close to the drive so the AC power wires are as short as possible.
F) Wires inside the enclosure should be placed as close as possible to conducting metal, cabinet walls and plates. It is
advised to terminate unused wires to chassis ground. [1]
G) To reduce ground current, use at least a 10mm2 (6 AWG) solid wire for ground connections.
[1] Grounding in general describes all metal parts which can be connected to a protective conductor, e.g. housing of
cabinet, motor housing, etc. to a central ground point. This central ground point is then connected to the main plant (or
building) ground.
[2] Or run as twisted pair at minimum.
Example Cable Screens Grounding
Figure C-3
Cable (Twisted Pair Conductors)
Conductive Clamp - Must contact bare cable shield

and be secured to metal backplane.
C-4 CE Guidelines MN764

Appendix D
Options and Kits
D.1 Dynamic Braking (DB) Hardware
Whenever a motor is abruptly stopped or forced to slow down quicker than if allowed to coast to a stop, the motor becomes
a generator. This energy appears on the DC Bus of the control and must be dissipated using dynamic braking hardware.
Dynamic braking resistors are completely assembled and mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. A listing of available RGA
assemblies is provided in Table D-1. Select the braking resistor that has correct ohm value for the control and adequate
continuous watts capacity to meet load requirements.
Table D-1 Dynamic Braking Resistor Assemblies (RGA)

Input Total* Continuous Rated Watts
HP
Volts Ohms 600 1200 2400 4800 6400 9600 14200
1-7.5 20 RGA620 RGA1220 RGA2420
10-20 6 RGA1206 RGA2406 RGA4806
230
25-40 4 RGA1204 RGA2404 RGA4804
50-60 2 RGA4802 RGA6402 RGA9602 RGA14202
1-3 120 RGA6120 RGA12120 RGA24120
5-10 60 RGA660 RGA1260 RGA2460 RGA4860
15-25 20 RGA620 RGA1220 RGA2420 RGA4820
460
30-50 10 RGA1210 RGA2410 RGA4810
60-125 4 RGA1204 RGA2404 RGA4804 RGA6404 RGA9604 RGA14204
150-500 2 RGA4802 RGA6402 RGA9602 RGA14202
1-3 120 RGA6120 RGA12120 RGA24120
5-10 60 RGA660 RGA1260 RGA2460 RGA4860
15-25 30 RGA630 RGA1230 RGA2430 RGA4830
575
30 24 RGA1224 RGA2424 RGA4824
40-125 14 RGA4814 RGA6414
150-300 4 RGA4804 RGA6404 RGA9604 RGA14204
*Note: Total Ohms column indicates the minimum resistance that the output transistors can drive. For example, if the Total Ohms
column indicates 6 ohms and a 6 ohm resistor is unavailable, an 8 ohm can be used but not a 4 ohm resistor.
MN764 Options and Kits D-1

D.2 Expansion Boards
Baldor offers a wide variety of plug-in expansion boards for their Controls. Expansion boards allow a control to be
compatible with various inputs and outputs. Each control can accept up to two expansion boards. Chapter 3 of this manual
describes the locations of the connectors for these expansion boards.
Table D-2 Expansion Board Descriptions

Catalog Number Description
EXBHH001A01 Ethernet Server Expansion Board
Uses standard RJ-45 female terminal for Ethernet connection. Provides easy connection to any
PC based Web Browser that has an Ethernet connection. Allows you to quickly access all drive
parameters for setup and review. Download parameter values, operating conditions, and fault log
data for review and archive.
EXBHH003A01 Isolated Input Expansion Board
Contains 9 isolated inputs, jumper configurable for 90-130 VAC. All inputs must be the same
voltage. One side of all inputs is common. This board replaces all the opto inputs on the main
control board. Uses screw terminals for connection.
EXBHH005A01 High resolution analog input/output board
Allows two inputs with up to 16 bits resolution. DC inputs: ±10V, 0-10V, ±5V, 0-5V, with 300
microvolt resolution. Current inputs: 4-20mA, with 0.6 microamps resolution.
Input Resolution
±10V 16 bit
0 - 10V 15 bit
±5V 15 bit
0 - 5V 14 bit
0 - 20mA 15 bit
4 - 20mA 15 bit
Both the 0-10V and 4-20mA inputs may be inverted to 10-0V and 20-4mA. Two outputs, each with
±10VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA with inverting capability. These are in addition to the two analog
outputs on the main control board (4 total). Uses screw terminals for connection.
EXBHH007A01 Master Pulse Reference / Isolated Pulse Follower
Jumper selection of the following modes:
1. Accepts a 5VDC or 12VDC quadrature pulse train input or pulse and direction input to use as a
master reference.
2. Re-transmits the input pulse train at 5VDC for ratios from 1:20 up to 65535:1. (Scaled output).
3. Can be used as a auxiliary encoder input to the control.
4. A CANopen port with an RJ-45 female connector for adding an additional I/O breakout box or
CAN HMI terminal.
EXBHH013A02 DeviceNet / EtherNet IP / Modbus-TCP Communications Expansion Board
Allows connection to DeviceNet Communications Bus. Allows connection to EtherNet/IP
Communications Bus. Allows connection to Modbus-TCP Communications Bus. Uses screw
terminals for DeviceNet connection.
EXBHH014A02 PROFIBUS-DP Expansion Board
Allows connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communications Bus. Uses 9-pin D-shell for connection.
EXBHH015A01 BACnet Expansion Board
Allows connection to a BACnet Communications Network.
Uses screw terminals for connection.
EXBHH016A01 LonWorks Communications Expansion Board
Allows connection to a LonWorks Communications Bus.
Uses plug-in terminals for connection.
EXBHH017A01 Metasys N2 Communications Expansion Board
Allows connection to or N2 communications network.
Uses screw terminals for connection.
D-2 Options and Kits MN764

D.3 Keypad Extension Cable
For the convenience of our customers, we offer a connector plug/cable assembly. This assembly provides the connectors
from the keypad to the control for remote keypad operation.
CAUTION: Only use cables manufactured by Baldor. Cables purchased from other sources may not be
properly wired and may damage the control or keypad and void the warranty.
Table D-3 Keypad Extension Cable Selection

Catalog Number Length
CBLHH015KP 5 ft (1.5m)
MN764 Options and Kits D-3

D.4 Optional Remote Keypad Installation
The keypad may be remotely mounted using optional Baldor keypad extension cable (refer to Table D-3). When the keypad
is properly mounted to a NEMA Type 4X enclosure, it retains the Type 4X rating. The mounting/drill template is located in
Appendix E of this manual.
CAUTION: Only use cables manufactured by Baldor. Cables purchased from other sources may not be
properly wired and may damage the control or keypad and void the warranty.
Tools Required:
• Center punch, tap handle, screwdrivers (Phillips and straight)

• #27 drill bit
• 1-3/8” standard knockout punch
• RTV Sealant
• (3) 6-32x3/8” screws
• (3) #6 Flat Washers
Mounting Instructions: For clearance mounting holes

1. Locate a flat 4” wide x 5.5” minimum high mounting surface. Material should be sufficient thickness (14 gauge minimum).
2. Place the template on the mounting surface or mark the holes as shown on the template (ensure template is not distorted
due to reproduction).
3. Accurately center punch the 3 mounting holes and the large knockout.
4. Drill three #27 clearance holes.
5. Locate the 1-3/8” knockout center and punch using the manufacturers instructions.
6. Debur knockout and mounting holes making sure the panel stays clean and flat.
7. Apply RTV to the three #27 clearance holes.
8. Assemble the keypad to the panel. Use 6-32 screws and flat washers.
9. From the inside of the panel, apply RTV over each of the three mounting screws. Cover a 3/4” area around each screw
making sure to completely encapsulate the screw head and washer.
10. Route the keypad cable into the control and connect to P2 of the control board, Figure D-1.
Figure D-1 Connector Locations
See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2. RS485
Regen Ribbon Cable Keypad S G A B S

1 JP3
Connector Connector P3
J8
J7 Control
P2
Circuit Board
D-4 Options and Kits MN764

Appendix E
Remote Keypad Mounting Template
E.1 Remote Keypad Mounting Template
Figure E-1
2.81
0.28
4.99
1.38 Knockout
3.95
1.89
Drill #27 Hole

3 Places
1.07
2.14
KP0030A00
Note: Template may be distorted due to reproduction.
MN764 Remote Keypad Mounting Template E-1

E-2 Remote Keypad Mounting Template MN764
Baldor District Offices
UNITED STATES MARYLAND OREGON MONTREAL, QUEBEC ITALY

BALTIMORE PORTLAND 5155 J-ARMAND Bombardier Via Sottobisio 30
ARIZONA 6660 SANTA BARBARA RD. 20393 SW AVERY COURT SAINT-Hubert, Québec Balerna CH-6828
PHOENIX SUITES 22-24 TUALATIN, OR 97062 Canada J3Z 1G4 Phone: +41 91 683 6161
4211 S 43RD PLACE ELKRIDGE, MD 21075 PHONE: 503-691-9010 PHONE: 514-933-2711 Fax: +41 91 630 2633
PHOENIX, AZ 85040 PHONE: 410-579-2135 FAX: 503-691-9012 FAX: 514-933-8639
PHONE: 602-470-0407 FAX: 410-579-2677 JAPAN
FAX: 602-470-0464 PENNSYLVANIA VANCOUVER, DIA BLDG 802,
MASSACHUSETTS PHILADELPHIA BRITISH COLUMBIA 2-21-1 TSURUYA-CHO,
ARKANSAS BOSTON 1035 THOMAS BUSCH 1538 KEBET WAY KANAGAWA-KU
CLARKSVILLE 6 PULLMAN STREET MEMORIAL HIGHWAY PORT COQUITLAM, YOKOHAMA, 221-0835, JAPAN
1001 COLLEGE AVENUE WORCESTER, MA 01606 PENNSAUKEN, NJ 08110 BRITISH COLUMBIA V3C 5M5 PHONE: 81-45-412-4506
CLARKSVILLE, AR 72830 PHONE: 508-854-0708 PHONE: 856-661-1442 PHONE 604-421-2822 FAX: 81-45-412-4507
PHONE: 479-754-9108 FAX: 508-854-0291 FAX: 856-663-6363 FAX: 604-421-3113
FAX: 479-754-9205 MEXICO
MICHIGAN PITTSBURGH WINNIPEG, MANITOBA LEON, guanajuato
CALIFORNIA DETROIT 159 PROMINENCE DRIVE 54 PRINCESS STREET KM. 2.0 BLVD. AEROPUERTO
LOS ANGELES 5993 Progress Drive NEW KENSINGTON, PA 15068 WINNIPEG, MANITOBA R3B 1K2 LEÓN 37545, GUANAJUATO, MÉXICO
6480 FLOTILLA STREET STERLING HEIGHTS, MI 48312 PHONE: 724-889-0092 PHONE: 204-942-5205 PHONE: +52 477 761 2030
COMMERCE, CA 90040 PHONE: 586-978-9800 FAX: 724-889-0094 FAX: 204-956-4251 FAX: +52 477 761 2010
PHONE: 323-724-6771 FAX: 586-978-9969
FAX: 323-721-5859 TENNESSEE AUSTRALIA MIDDLE EAST & NORTH AFRICA
MINNESOTA MEMPHIS UNIT 3, 6 STANTON ROAD VSE INTERNATIONAL CORP.
HAYWARD MINNEAPOLIS 4000 WINCHESTER ROAD SEVEN HILLS, NSW 2147, AUSTRALIA P. O. BOX 5618
21056 FORBES AVENUE 21080 134TH AVENUE NORTH MEMPHIS, TN 38118 PHONE: (61) (2) 9674 5455 BUFFALO GROVE, IL 60089-5618
HAYWARD, CA 94545 ROGERS, MN 55374 PHONE: 901-365-2020 FAX: (61) (2) 9674 2495 PHONE: 847 590 5547
PHONE: 510-785-9900 PHONE: 763-428-3633 FAX: 901-365-3914 FAX: 847 590 5587
FAX: 510-785-9910 FAX: 763-428-4551 UNIT 8, 5 KELLETTS ROAD
TEXAS ROWVILLE, VICTORIA, 3178 AUSTRALIA PANAMA
COLORADO MISSOURI DALLAS PHONE: (61) (3) 9753 4355 AVE. RICARDO J. ALFARO
DENVER ST LOUIS 2920 114th Street Suite 100 FAX: (61) (3) 9753 4366 EDIFICIO SUN TOWERS MALL
3855 Forest Street 422 INDUSTRIAL DRIVE Grand Prairie, TX 75050 PISO 2, LOCAL 55
Denver, CO 80207 MARYLAND HEIGHTS, MO 63043 PHONE: 214-634-7271 el salvador Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
PHONE: 303-623-0127 PHONE: 314-298-1800 FAX: 214-634-8874 RESIDENCIAL PINARES DE SUIZA PHONE: +507 236-5155
FAX: 303-595-3772 FAX: 314-298-7660 POL. 15 #44, Fax: +507 236-0591
HOUSTON NVA. SAN SALVADOR, EL SALVADOR
CONNECTICUT KANSAS CITY 10355 W. Little York ROAD PHONE: +503 2288-1519 SINGAPORE
WALLINGFORD 1501 BEDFORD AVENUE Suite 300 FAX: +503 2288-1518 18 KAKI BUKIT ROAD 3, #03-09
65 SOUTH TURNPIKE ROAD NORTH KANSAS CITY, MO 64116 Houston, TX 77041 ENTREPRENEUR BUSINESS CENTRE
WALLINGFORD, CT 06492 PHONE: 816-587-0272 PHONE: 281-977-6500 CHILE SINGAPORE 415978
PHONE: 203-269-1354 FAX: 816-587-3735 FAX: 281-977-6510 Luis Thayer Ojeda 166, PHONE: (65) 6744 2572
FAX: 203-269-5485 of 402 - Providencia FAX: (65) 6747 1708
NEW YORK UTAH Santiago, Chile
FLORIDA AUBURN SALT LAKE CITY Phone: +56 2 816 9900 SWITZERLAND
TAMPA/PUERTO RICO/ ONE ELLIS DRIVE 2230 SOUTH MAIN STREET POSTFACH 73
VIRGIN ISLANDS AUBURN, NY 13021 SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84115 CHINA SCHUTZENSTRASSE 59
3906 EAST 11TH AVENUE PHONE: 315-255-3403 PHONE: 801-832-0127 160 Song SHENG road CH-8245 FEUERTHALEN
TAMPA, FL 33605 FAX: 315-253-9923 FAX: 801-832-8911 Songjiang INDUSTRY ZONE SWITZERLAND
PHONE: 813-248-5078 Shanghai 201613, China PHONE: +41 52 647 4700
FAX: 813-247-2984 NORTH CAROLINA WISCONSIN PHONE: +86 21 5760 5335 FAX: +41 52 659 2394
GREENSBORO MILWAUKEE Fax : +86 21 5760 5336
GEORGIA 1220 ROTHERWOOD ROAD 1960 SOUTH Calhoun Road TAIWAN
ATLANTA GREENSBORO, NC 27406 NEW BERLIN, WI 53151 GERMANY 1F, No 126 Wenshan 3rd Street,
62 TECHNOLOGY DRIVE PHONE: 336-272-6104 PHONE: 262-784-5940 Hermann-Heinrich - Gossen 3 Nantun District,
ALPHARETTA, GA 30005 FAX: 336-273-6628 FAX: 262-784-1215 50858 Koln, Germany Taichung City 408
PHONE: 770-772-7000 Phone: 49-2234379410 Taiwan R.O.C
FAX: 770-772-7200 OHIO INTERNATIONAL SALES Fax: 49-22343794164 PHONE: (886) 4 238 04235
CINCINNATI FORT SMITH, AR FAX: (886) 4 238 04463
ILLINOIS 2929 CRESCENTVILLE ROAD P.O. BOX 2400 DIESELSTRASSE 22
CHICAGO WEST CHESTER, OH 45069 FORT SMITH, AR 72902 D-85551 KIRCHHEIM UNITED KINGDOM
340 remington blvd. PHONE: 513-771-2600 PHONE: 479-646-4711 MUNICH, GERMANY 6 BRISTOL DISTRIBUTION PARK
BOLINGBROOK, IL 60440 FAX: 513-772-2219 FAX: 479-648-5895 PHONE: +49 89 90 5080 HAWKLEY DRIVE
PHONE: 630-296-1400 FAX: +49 89 90 50 8492 BRISTOL BS32 0BF U.K.
FAX: 630-226-9420 CLEVELAND CANADA PHONE: +44 1454 850000
8929 FREEWAY DRIVE EDMONTON, ALBERTA INDIA FAX: +44 1454 859001
INDIANA MACEDONIA, OH 44056 4053-92 STREET 14, COMMERCE AVENUE
INDIANAPOLIS PHONE: 330-468-4777 EDMONTON, ALBERTA T6E 6R8 MAHAGANESH COLONY Venezuela
5525 W. MINNESOTA STREET FAX: 330-468-4778 PHONE: 780-434-4900 PAUD ROAD Av. Roma. Qta el Milagro. Urb.
INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46241 FAX: 780-438-2600 PUNE - 411038 California Norte
PHONE: 317-246-5100 OKLAHOMA MAHARASHTRA, INDIA Caracas, 1070
FAX: 317-246-5110 TULSA TORONTO PHONE: +91 20 25 45 27 17 / 18 Venezuela
7170 S. Braden, Suite 140 OAKVILLE, ONTARIO FAX: +91 20 25 45 27 19 Phone/fax: +58 212 272 7343
IOWA Tulsa, OK 74136 2750 COVENTRY ROAD mobile: +58 414 114 8623
DES MOINES PHONE: 918-366-9320 OAKVILLE, ONTARIO L6H 6R1 INDonesia
1800 DIXON STREET, SUITE C FAX: 918-366-9338 PHONE: 905-829-3301 Talavera Office Park,
DES MOINES, IA 50316 FAX: 905-829-3302 28th Floor, Suite M18
PHONE: 515-263-6929 JI. T.B. Simatupang, Kav. 22-26
FAX: 515-263-6515 Jakarta 12430, Indonesia
PHONE: +62 21 7599 9879
FAX: + 62 21 7599 9878
!764-1110*
Baldor Electric Company

World Headquarters
P.O. Box 2400, Fort Smith, AR 72902-2400 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 479.646.4711, Fax (1) 479.648.5792, International Fax (1) 479.648.5895
www.baldor.com
© Baldor Electric Company All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.

MN764 11/10

Vs1Sp AC V/HZ and Sensorless Vector Control: Installation & Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vs1Sp AC V/HZ and Sensorless Vector Control: Installation & Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vs1Sp AC V/HZ and Sensorless Vector Control: Installation & Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VS1SP

AC V/Hz and Sensorless Vector

11/10 Installation & Operating Manual MN764

1.1 Getting Assistance from Baldor

1.2 Safety Notice

CLASSIFICATIONS OF CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

MN764 Introduction 1-1

1-2 Introduction MN764

Procedure - Initial Conditions

MN764 Introduction 1-3

Minimum Signal Connections

AC Power & Motor Connections

1-4 Introduction MN764

2.1 Limited Warranty

2.2.1 Design and Test Standards

2.2.2 Environmental Test Standards

See also Appendix C for general recommendations for CE compliance.

MN764 General Information 2-1

3.1 Receiving & Inspection

3.2 General Requirements for the Installation Site

3.3 Mounting the Drive

MN764 Installing the Drive 3-1

Figure 3-1 Cover Removal

I/O Module I/O Module

Power & Motor Analog/Digital

3.5 Cover Removal Procedure (NEMA 4X Frames AA and B):

3-2 Installing the Drive MN764

Figure 3-2 Cover Replacement (NEMA 4X)

Maximum cover screw torque:

MN764 Installing the Drive 3-3

Figure 4-1 Recommended System Grounding

Note: Motor thermal leads must be run in

4.1.1 Ungrounded Distribution System

4.1.2 Input Power Conditioning

4.2 Line Impedance

Volts No Load VoltsFull Load

MN764 Power Wiring 4-1

4-2 Power Wiring MN764

Figure 4-2 Filter and Reactor Connections

Table 4-2 240VAC Three Phase Breaker Size

MN764 Power Wiring 4-3

4-4 Power Wiring MN764

MN764 Power Wiring 4-5

*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.

Table 4-6 600VAC Three Phase Breaker Size

4-6 Power Wiring MN764

Figure 4-3 Power Connections

L1 L2 L3 R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND L1 L2 L3 B+/R1 R2 B-

TH1 TH2 GND

Input AC Power DB Control Motor Thermal DB Control

TH1 TH2 GND B+ B- T1 T2 T3

See recommended tightening torques in Table A-2.

MN764 Power Wiring 4-7

1. See “Protective Devices” described previously in this section.

4.9 Operating a 3 Phase Control on Single Phase Input Power

4.9.1 Single Phase Power Derating:

*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.

4-8 Power Wiring MN764

*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.

Note 1 Fuses Note 1 Fuses

Note 4 Optional Optional